Pioneer Stereo Receiver VSXAX2ASs User Manual
AUDIO/VIDEO MULTI-CHANNEL  
RECEIVER  
VSX-AX4ASi-G  
VSX-AX4ASi-S  
VSX-AX2AS-S  
Operating Instructions  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CAUTION  
This product is for general household purposes. Any  
failure due to use for other than household purposes  
(such as long-term use for business purposes in a  
restaurant or use in a car or ship) and which  
The STANDBY/ON switch on this unit will not  
completely shut off all power from the AC outlet.  
Since the power cord serves as the main disconnect  
device for the unit, you will need to unplug it from  
the AC outlet to shut down all power. Therefore,  
make sure the unit has been installed so that the  
power cord can be easily unplugged from the AC  
outlet in case of an accident. To avoid fire hazard,  
the power cord should also be unplugged from the  
AC outlet when left unused for a long period of time  
(for example, when on vacation).  
requires repair will be charged for even during the  
warranty period.  
K041_En  
If the AC plug of this unit does not match the AC  
outlet you want to use, the plug must be removed  
and appropriate one fitted. Replacement and  
mounting of an AC plug on the power supply cord of  
this unit should be performed only by qualified  
service personnel. If connected to an AC outlet, the  
cut-off plug can cause severe electrical shock. Make  
sure it is properly disposed of after removal.  
Voltage selector  
You can find the voltage selector switch on the rear  
panel of multi-voltage models.  
The factory setting for the voltage selector is 220 V.  
Please set it to the correct voltage for your country  
or region.  
• Saudi Arabia operates on 127 V and 220 V mains  
voltage. Please set to the correct voltage before using.  
• For Taiwan, please set to 110 V before using.  
The equipment should be disconnected by removing  
the mains plug from the wall socket when left  
unused for a long period of time (for example, when  
on vacation).  
D3-4-2-2-1a_A_En  
• For Mexico, please set to 120 V to 127 V before using.  
Before changing the voltage, disconnect the AC power  
cord. Use a medium size screwdriver to change the  
voltage selector switch.  
TWO VOLTAGE  
SELECTORS  
Medium size  
screwdriver  
220 V  
230-  
240 V  
110 V 120-127 V  
110 V  
220 V  
230-240 V  
120- 127 V  
D3-4-2-1-5_En  
For Taiwan exclusively  
Taiwanese two pin flat-bladed plug  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
01 Before you start  
05 Listening to your system  
Checking what’s in the box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6  
Installing the receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6  
Loading the batteries. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6  
Auto playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28  
Listening in surround sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28  
Standard surround sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28  
Using the Home THX modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29  
Using the Advanced surround effects . . . . . . . . . . . 29  
Listening in stereo. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30  
Using Stream Direct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30  
Selecting MCACC presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30  
Choosing the input signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31  
Using surround back channel processing . . . . . . . . . 31  
Using the Virtual Surround Back mode . . . . . . . . . . 31  
Using the Sound Retriever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32  
02 5 minute guide  
Introduction to home theater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7  
Listening to Surround Sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7  
Automatically setting up for surround sound  
(MCACC). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7  
Problems when using the Auto MCACC Setup . . . . . 9  
Playing a source. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9  
Better sound using Phase Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9  
06 Using the tuner  
03 Connecting your equipment  
Listening to the radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33  
Improving FM stereo sound. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33  
Tuning directly to a station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33  
Saving station presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33  
Naming station presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34  
Listening to station presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34  
Rear panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10  
When making cable connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11  
About the video converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11  
Connecting your TV and DVD player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12  
Connecting a satellite/cable receiver or other  
set-top box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13  
Connecting a DVD/HDD recorder, VCR and other  
video sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13  
Using the component video jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14  
Connecting digital audio sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15  
About the WMA9 Pro decoder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15  
Connecting analog audio sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16  
Connecting a component to the front panel inputs . . 16  
Installing your speaker system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17  
Connecting the speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17  
Placing the speakers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18  
THX speaker system setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19  
Connecting antennas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19  
AM loop antenna. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19  
FM wire antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20  
Using an external antenna to improve FM  
07 The System Setup menu  
Making receiver settings from the System Setup  
menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35  
Automatic MCACC (Expert) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35  
Surround back speaker setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37  
Manual MCACC setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38  
Fine Channel Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38  
Fine Speaker Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39  
Standing Wave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39  
Acoustic Calibration EQ. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40  
Professional Acoustic Calibration EQ . . . . . . . . . . . 40  
Data Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43  
Manual speaker setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44  
Speaker Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45  
Channel Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45  
Speaker Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46  
Bass Peak Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46  
X-Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47  
THX Audio Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47  
reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20  
Using an external antenna to improve AM  
reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20  
Plugging in the receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21  
04 Controls and displays  
Front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22  
Operating range of remote control unit . . . . . . . . . . 23  
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24  
Remote control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25  
Sub remote control unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27  
4
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
08 Other connections  
11 Controlling the rest of your system  
Connecting an iPod. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48  
Connecting your iPod to the receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . 48  
iPod playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48  
Watching photos and video content . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49  
Connecting using HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50  
About HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50  
Using the i.LINK interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51  
Checking the i.LINK inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52  
About i.LINK. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52  
About PQLS rate control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52  
Creating an i.LINK network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52  
Connecting the multichannel analog inputs . . . . . . . 53  
Selecting the multichannel analog inputs . . . . . . . . 53  
Using the USB interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54  
Second Zone speaker B setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55  
Switching the speaker system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55  
Bi-amping your front speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55  
Bi-wiring your speakers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56  
Connecting additional amplifiers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56  
Multi-room listening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57  
Making multi-room connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57  
Using the multi-room controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58  
Connecting an IR receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59  
Switching components on and off using the 12 volt  
trigger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60  
Using this receiver with a Pioneer plasma display. . . 60  
Using the SR+ mode with a Pioneer plasma  
Setting the remote to control other components . . . 71  
Selecting preset codes directly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71  
Programming signals from other remote controls . . 71  
Erasing one of the remote control button settings . . 72  
Resetting the remote control presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72  
Confirming preset codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72  
Renaming input source names. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73  
Direct function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73  
Multi Operation and System Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73  
Programming a multi-operation or a shutdown  
sequence. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73  
Using multi operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74  
Using System off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74  
Controls for TVs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75  
Controls for other components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75  
Operating other Pioneer components with this  
unit’s sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76  
12 Additional information  
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77  
Power. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77  
No sound. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78  
Other audio problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79  
Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80  
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80  
Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81  
Remote control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81  
i.LINK interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82  
i.LINK messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82  
USB interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83  
HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83  
iPod messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83  
Surround sound formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84  
Dolby . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84  
DTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84  
Windows Media® Audio 9 Professional . . . . . . . . . 85  
About THX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85  
Listening modes with different input signal  
display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61  
Connecting a PC for Advanced MCACC output . . . . . 62  
Advanced MCACC output using your PC . . . . . . . . . 62  
09 Other Settings  
The Input Setup menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63  
Input function default and possible settings . . . . . . 64  
The Other Setup menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64  
Multi-Room setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65  
SR+ Setup for Pioneer plasma displays. . . . . . . . . . 65  
OSD Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65  
formats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86  
Stream direct with different input signal formats . . . 88  
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89  
Cleaning the unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90  
Our philosophy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90  
Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90  
10 Using other functions  
Setting the AV options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66  
Making an audio or a video recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67  
Playing a different source when recording. . . . . . . . 68  
Reducing the level of an analog signal . . . . . . . . . . . . 68  
Watching video and audio sources independently . . 68  
Using the sleep timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69  
Dimming the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69  
Switching the speaker impedance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69  
Checking your system settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69  
Resetting the system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70  
Default system settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70  
5
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Before you start  
01  
Chapter 1:  
Before you start  
Checking what’s in the box  
Loading the batteries  
Please check that you've received the following supplied  
accessories:  
Main remote control unit:  
• Setup microphone (cable: 5 m.)  
• Remote control unit  
• Sub room remote control unit (VSX-AX4ASi only)  
• AA/R6P dry cell batteries (VSX-AX4ASi) x4 / (VSX-  
AX2AS) x2  
• AM loop antenna  
• FM wire antenna  
Sub room remote control unit (VSX-AX4ASi only):  
• iPod cable  
• Power cords x2  
• Antenna adapter  
• Flat-bladed converter plug  
• These operating instructions  
Caution  
Incorrect use of batteries may result in such hazards as  
leakage and bursting. Observe the following precautions:  
Installing the receiver  
• When installing this unit, make sure to put it on a  
level and stable surface.  
• Never use new and old batteries together.  
• Insert the plus and minus sides of the batteries  
properly according to the marks in the battery case.  
Don’t install it on the following places:  
– on a color TV (the screen may distort)  
– near a cassette deck (or close to a device that gives off  
a magnetic field). This may interfere with the sound.  
– in direct sunlight  
– in damp or wet areas  
– in extremely hot or cold areas  
– in places where there is vibration or other movement  
– in places that are very dusty  
– in places that have hot fumes or oils (such as a kitchen)  
• Batteries with the same shape may have different  
voltages. Do not use different batteries together.  
• When disposing of used batteries, please comply  
with governmental regulations or environmental  
public instruction’s rules that apply in your country or  
area.  
• Do not use or store batteries in direct sunlight or  
other excessively hot place, such as inside a car or  
near a heater. This can cause batteries to leak,  
overheat, explode or catch fire. It can also reduce the  
life or performance of batteries.  
6
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5 minute guide  
02  
C5hampteri2n: ute guide  
3
Plug in the receiver and switch it on, followed by  
your DVD player, your subwoofer and the TV.  
Make sure you’ve set the video input on your TV to this  
receiver. Check the manual that came with the TV if you  
don’t know how to do this.  
Introduction to home theater  
Home theater refers to the use of multiple audio tracks to  
create a surround sound effect, making you feel like  
you're in the middle of the action or concert. The  
surround sound you get from a home theater system  
depends not only on your speaker setup, but also on the  
source and the sound settings of the receiver.  
• Set the subwoofer volume to a comfortable level.  
4
Use the on-screen automatic MCACC setup to set up  
your system.  
See Automatically setting up for surround sound  
(MCACC) below for more on this.  
This receiver will automatically decode multichannel  
Dolby Digital, DTS, or Dolby Surround sources according  
to your speaker setup. In most cases, you won’t have to  
make changes for realistic surround sound, but other  
possibilities (like listening to a CD with multichannel  
surround sound) are explained in Listening to your  
system on page 28.  
5
Play a DVD, and adjust the volume to your liking.  
Make sure that DVD/LD is showing in the receiver’s  
display, indicating that the DVD input is selected. If it  
isn’t, press DVD/LD on the remote control to set the  
receiver to the DVD input.  
In addition to the basic playback explained in Playing a  
source on page 9, there are several other sound options  
you can select. See Listening to your system on page 28  
for more on this.  
Listening to Surround Sound  
This receiver was designed with the easiest possible  
setup in mind, so with the following quick setup guide,  
you should have your system hooked up for surround  
sound in no time at all. In most cases, you can simply  
leave the receiver in the default settings.  
See also Making receiver settings from the System Setup  
menu on page 35 for more setup options.  
• Be sure to complete all connections before  
connecting this unit to an AC power source.  
Automatically setting up for surround  
sound (MCACC)  
1
Connect your TV and DVD player.  
The Auto MCACC Setup measures the acoustic  
characteristics of your listening area, taking into account  
ambient noise, speaker size and distance, and tests for  
both channel delay and channel level. After you have set  
up the microphone provided with your system, the  
receiver uses the information from a series of test tones  
to optimize the speaker settings and equalization for your  
particular room.  
See Connecting your TV and DVD player on page 12 to do  
this. For surround sound, you’ll want to hook up using a  
digital connection from the DVD player to the receiver.  
2
Connect your speakers and place them for optimal  
surround sound.  
Connect your speakers as shown in Installing your  
speaker system on page 17.  
Where you place the speakers will have a big effect on the  
sound. Place your speakers as shown below for the best  
surround sound effect. Also see Placing the speakers on  
page 18 for more on this.  
Make sure you do this before moving on to Playing a  
source on page 9.  
Important  
Center (C)  
Front  
Right (R)  
• Make sure the microphone and speakers are not  
moved during the Auto MCACC Setup.  
Front  
Left (L)  
• Using the Auto MCACC Setup will overwrite any  
existing settings for the MCACC preset you select.  
Subwoofer (SW)  
Surround  
Right (SR)  
• Before using the Auto MCACC Setup the  
headphones should be disconnected.  
Surround  
Back  
Right (SBR)  
Listening  
position  
Caution  
Surround  
Left (SL)  
• The test tones used in the Auto MCACC Setup are  
output at high volume.  
Surround  
Back Left (SBL)  
7
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5 minute guide  
02  
7
Wait for the test tones to finish then confirm the  
SYSTEM OFF  
INPUT  
RECEIVER  
SOURCE  
D.ACCESS  
CLASS  
ENTER  
speaker configuration in the OSD.  
SELECT  
+
10  
DISC  
A progress report is displayed on-screen while the  
receiver outputs test tones to determine the speakers  
present in your setup. Try to be as quiet as possible while  
AV PARAMETER  
CH LEVEL  
MENU  
TOP MENU ì  
TUNE  
ST  
ST  
T.EDIT  
ì
ENTER  
RETURN  
SETUP  
ꢀ
5
TUNE  
GUIDEPTY SEARCH  
BAND  
it’s doing this.  
CD  
TV  
VIDEO  
2
TV CONTROL  
DVD  
SAT  
VIDEO 1  
TV CONT  
• With error messages (such as Ambient Noise or  
Microphone Check) select RETRY after checking for  
ambient noise (see Problems when using the Auto  
MCACC Setup below) and verifying the mic  
connection. If there doesn’t seem to be a problem,  
you can simply select OK and continue.  
INPUT  
SELECT  
TV VOL  
TV CH  
VOL  
DVR2  
CD-R  
i Pod  
MULTI IN  
TUNER  
ROOM2/3  
RECEIVER  
DVR1  
1
2
Switch on the receiver and your TV.  
Connect the microphone to the MCACC SETUP MIC  
jack on the front panel.  
1.Auto MCACC  
Now Analyzing  
1.Auto MCACC  
Check!  
Place the microphone so that it’s about ear level at your  
normal listening position (use a tripod if possible). Make  
sure there are no obstacles between the speakers and  
the microphone.  
…
(2/9)  
Front  
[
[
[
[
[
YES  
YES  
YES  
Yx2  
YES  
]
]
]
]
]
Environment Check  
Ambient Noise  
Microphone  
Center  
Surround  
SB  
[
[
[
OK  
]
]
]
Speaker YES/NO  
SUB W.  
[
OK  
]
MULTI  
–
ROOM  
&
(TUNE +)  
SPEAKERS  
BAND  
SOURCE/REC SEL  
VIDEO  
SELECT  
SIGNAL SBch  
SELECT PROCESSING  
ꢀ:Cancel  
ꢀ:Cancel  
STEREO  
CONTROL ON/OFF  
AV  
TUNER  
EDIT  
PARAMETER  
VIDEO/GAME  
2
INPUT  
PHONES  
MCACC  
SETUP MIC  
(ST –)  
ENTER  
(ST +)  
ꢀ
SETUP  
RETURN  
DIGITAL IN S-VIDEO  
VIDEO  
L
AUDIO  
R
The configuration shown on-screen should reflect the  
actual speakers you have.  
(TUNE –)  
6
If you see an error message (ERR) in the right side  
column (or the speaker configuration displayed isn’t  
correct), there may be a problem with the speaker  
connection. If selecting RETRY doesn’t work, turn off the  
power and check the speaker connections. If there  
doesn’t seem to be a problem, you can simply use ꢀ/ꢁ  
to select the speaker and ꢂ/ꢃ to change the setting  
(and number for surround back) and continue.  
3
Press RECEIVER on the remote, then press SETUP 1  
.
An on-screen display (OSD) appears on your TV. Use the  
ꢀ/ꢁ/ꢂ/ꢃ buttons and ENTER to navigate through the  
screens and select menu items. Press RETURN to exit  
2
the current menu. Press SETUP at any time to cancel.  
4
Select ‘Auto MCACC’ from the System Setup menu  
then press ENTER  
.
8
Make sure ‘OK’ is selected, then press ENTER.  
System Setup  
1.Auto MCACC  
A progress report is displayed on-screen while the  
receiver outputs more test tones to determine the  
optimum receiver settings for channel level, speaker  
distance, and Acoustic Calibration EQ.  
1.Auto MCACC  
Surr Back System  
2.Surr Back System  
3.Manual MCACC  
4.Data Management  
5.Manual SP Setup  
6.Input Setup  
[
Normal (SB)  
]
]
Data Save to  
[M1. MEMORY  
1
Setting Start?  
ENTER:Next  
[OK]  
7.Other Setup  
[Option]  
Again, try to be as quiet as possible while this is  
happening. It may take 2 to 6 minutes.  
ꢀ:Cancel  
ꢀ
:
Exit  
3
5
Make sure ‘Normal (SB)’ is selected, select an  
9
The Auto MCACC Setup has finished! PressRETURN  
4
7
MCACC preset then select OK.  
to go back to the System Setup menu.  
The settings made in the Auto MCACC Setup should give  
you excellent surround sound from your system, but it is  
also possible to adjust these settings manually using the  
6
Follow the instructions on-screen.  
Make sure the microphone is connected, and if you’re  
using a subwoofer, make sure it is switched on and set to  
a comfortable volume level.  
8
System Setup menu (starting on page 35).  
Note  
1 You can’t use the System Setup menu when the iPod input source is selected (in either the main or sub room).  
2 If you cancel the Auto MCACC Setup, or leave an error message for over three minutes, the screen saver will appear.  
3 • If you are planning on bi-amping your front speakers, or setting up a separate speaker system in another room, read through Surround back speaker  
setting on page 37 and make sure to connect your speakers as necessary before continuing to step 6.  
• If you have THX-certified speakers, select Option and choose YES for the THX Speaker setting.  
4 The six MCACC presets are used for storing surround sound settings for different listening positions. Simply choose an unused preset for now (you can  
rename it later in Data Management on page 43).  
5 Do not adjust the volume during the test tones. This may result in incorrect speaker settings.  
6 If you’re using the front panel display, the diagram in Listening to Surround Sound above indicates (in bold) how each speaker is displayed.  
7 You can also choose to view the settings from the MCACC Data Check screen. See Automatic MCACC (Expert) on page 35 for more on this.  
8 • Depending on the characteristics of your room, sometimes identical speakers with cone sizes of around 12 cm will end up with different size settings.  
You can correct the setting manually using the Manual speaker setup on page 44.  
• The subwoofer distance setting may be farther than the actual distance from the listening position. This setting should be accurate (taking delay and  
room characteristics into account) and generally does not need to be changed.  
8
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5 minute guide  
02  
Problems when using the Auto MCACC Setup  
If the room environment is not optimal for the Auto  
MCACC Setup (too much background noise, echo off the  
walls, obstacles blocking the speakers from the  
microphone) the final settings may be incorrect. Check  
for household appliances (air conditioner, fridge, fan,  
etc.), that may be affecting the environment and switch  
them off if necessary. If there are any instructions  
showing in the front panel display, please follow them.  
Better sound using Phase Control  
This receiver’s Phase Control feature uses phase  
correction measures to make sure your sound source  
arrives at the listening position in phase, preventing  
unwanted distortion and/or coloring of the sound (see  
illustration below).  
P
Front speaker  
Listening  
position  
H
A
S
• Some older TVs may interfere with the operation of  
the microphone. If this seems to be happening,  
switch off the TV when doing the Auto MCACC Setup.  
E
?
C
O
N
T
O
F
Sound  
source  
F
Subwoofer  
Playing a source  
Here are the basic instructions for playing a source (such  
as a DVD disc) with your home theater system.  
Front speaker  
Listening  
position  
P
H
A
S
SYSTEM OFF  
INPUT  
RECEIVER  
SOURCE  
SELECT  
E
AV PARAMETER  
CH LEVEL  
MENU  
DISP  
STATUS SIGNAL SEL  
CH  
PHOTO  
SBch  
CH  
TOP MENU ì  
TUNE  
C
O
N
T
STEREO  
ST  
ST  
T.EDIT  
ì
ENTER  
RETURN  
SETUP  
MULTI OPE  
SHIFT  
THX  
STANDARD ADV. SURR  
ꢀ
TUNE  
GUIDEPTY SEARCH  
BAND  
Sound  
source  
PHASE  
MCACC  
S.DIRECT  
TV CONTROL  
O
N
Subwoofer  
CD  
TV  
VIDEO  
2
INPUT  
TV VOL  
TV CH  
VOL  
DVD  
SAT  
VIDEO 1  
TV CONT  
SELECT  
REC  
DVR2  
CD-R  
i Pod  
MULTI IN  
TUNER  
ROOM2/3  
RECEIVER  
DVR1  
RECEIVER  
MUTE  
A
Phase Control technology provides coherent sound  
4
reproduction through the use of phase matching for an  
optimal sound image at your listening position. The  
default setting is on and we recommend leaving Phase  
Control switched on for all sound sources.  
PHOTO  
1
Switch on your system components and receiver.  
Start by switching on the playback component (for  
example a DVD player), your TV and subwoofer (if you  
have one), then the receiver (press ꢁ RECEIVER).  
1
STATUS SIGNAL SEL  
SBch  
STEREO  
• Make sure the setup mic is disconnected.  
MULTI OPE  
SHIFT  
THX  
STANDARD ADV. SURR  
2
Select the input source you want to play.  
PHASE  
MCACC  
S.DIRECT  
You can use the input source buttons on the remote  
control, INPUT SELECT, or the front panel INPUT  
SELECTOR dial.  
2
RECEIVER  
3
Press S. DIRECT  
(
STREAM DIRECT) to select ‘AUTO  
•
Press PHASE (PHASE CONTROL) to switch on phase  
3
SURROUND’ and start playback of the source.  
correction.  
If you’re playing a Dolby Digital or DTS surround sound  
DVD disc, you should hear surround sound. If you are  
playing a stereo source, you will only hear sound from the  
front left/right speakers in the default listening mode.  
The PHASE CONTROL indicator on the front panel lights.  
• See also Listening to your system on page 28 for  
information on different ways of listening to sources.  
4
Use the volume control to adjust the volume level.  
Turn down the volume of your TV so that all sound is  
coming from the speakers connected to this receiver.  
Note  
1 Make sure that the TV’s video input is set to this receiver. (For example, if you connected this receiver to the VIDEO 1 jacks on your TV, make sure that  
the VIDEO 1 input is now selected.)  
2 If you need to manually switch the input signal type press SIGNAL SEL (page 31).  
3 • You may need to check the digital audio output settings on your DVD player or digital satellite receiver. It should be set to output Dolby Digital, DTS  
and 88.2 kHz/96 kHz PCM (2 channel) audio, and if there is an MPEG audio option, set this to convert the MPEG audio to PCM.  
• Depending on your DVD player or source discs, you may only get digital 2 channel stereo and analog sound. In this case, the receiver must be set to  
a multichannel listening mode (see Listening in surround sound on page 28 if you need to do this) if you want multichannel surround sound.  
4 Phase matching is a very important factor in achieving proper sound reproduction. If two waveforms are 'in phase', they crest and trough together, re-  
sulting in increased amplitude, clarity and presence of the sound signal. If a crest of a wave meets a trough (as shown in the upper section of the diagram  
above) then the sound will be 'out of phase' and an unreliable sound image will be produced.  
9
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting your equipment  
03  
CChaoptnern3 ecting your equipment  
This receiver provides you with many connection possibilities, but it doesn’t have to be difficult. This page explains the  
kinds of components you can connect to make up your home theater system.  
Rear panel  
This illustration shows the VSX-AX4ASi, however connections for the VSX-AX2AS are the same except where noted.  
10  
MULTI-ROOM  
MULTI-ROOM  
& SOURCE  
MAIN ROOM(ZONE1)  
AUDIO  
P
PRE OUT  
L
O VOLTAGE  
LECTORS  
& SOURCE  
ANTENNA  
AM LOOP  
AC IN  
/
REC SEL  
20  
21  
1
6
4
FRONT  
OUT1  
ROOM3  
(ZONE3)  
FM UNBAL 75 Ω  
13  
16  
S400  
IN1  
IN  
MROOM & SOURCE  
ROOM2(ZONE2)  
MONITOR  
OUT  
(
)
AUDIO  
ROOM2(ZONE2)  
OUT  
CENTER  
L
OUT2  
SUB W.  
11  
8
CD  
IN2  
S400  
OUT  
IN  
USB  
AUDIO  
IN  
SUR-  
2
3
12 V TRIGGER  
HDMI  
IN1  
ROUND  
DVD/  
LD  
5
7
2
12  
1
2
IN  
IN  
IN  
SUR-  
1
SAT  
IN  
(DC OUT 12V TOTAL 50 mA MAX)  
ROUND  
BACK  
(
)
R
OUT  
MULTI-ROOM  
SOURCE  
&
TV  
IN  
220 V  
230-  
240 V  
8
MONITOR  
OUT  
2
IN  
(ZONE2)  
(
)
Single  
IN2  
IN3  
IN4  
OUT  
110 V 120-127 V  
(
CD-R/  
TAPE  
DVR/  
R
L
)
VCR 1  
OUT  
Y
I
1
2
(
(
2
)
DVD/LD  
TV  
IN  
IN  
1
SAT  
IN  
110 V  
220 V  
9
)
IN  
R
120-127 V  
230-240 V  
3
IN  
L
(
DVR/  
)
VCR 2  
ASSIGNABLE  
FR  
FL  
i
VIDEO /  
GAME1  
IN  
SPEAKERS  
4
PB  
PR  
PB  
PR  
17  
IN  
14  
IN  
SURROUND BACK /  
R
(
)
CD-R  
B
FRONT  
CENTER  
SURROUND  
(
L
)
Single  
R
L
R
L
1
4
SUB W.  
CENTER  
19  
ASSIGNA-  
BLE  
OUT  
1
1
2
IN  
SUR-  
DVR/  
(
DVD/  
ROUND  
VCR 1  
3
2
IN  
)
IN  
LD  
18  
IN  
Y
Y
2
CD  
IN  
R
L
L
(
)
OUT  
PB  
PB  
DVR/  
R
RS-232C  
SURROUND  
BACK  
VCR 2  
PR  
PR  
3
IN  
MULTI CH  
IN  
15  
SELECTABLE  
OUT  
IN  
R
L
S-VIDEO  
VIDEO  
ASSIGNABLE  
COMPONENT VIDEO  
1
CONTROL  
DIGITAL  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
5
HDMI connectors (x4) (VSX-AX2AS) (x5) (VSX-AX4ASi)  
Caution  
Multiple inputs and one output for high-quality audio/  
video connection to compatible HDMI devices.  
ꢄ Connecting using HDMI on page 50.  
• Before making or changing the connections, switch  
off the power and disconnect the power cord from the  
power outlet. Plugging in should be the final step.  
6
Remote inputs (multi-room and source)  
Use for connection to an external remote control sensor  
for use in a multi-room setup, for example.  
ꢄ Connecting an IR receiver on page 59.  
1
Optical digital audio output(s)  
Use the OUT1 and (VSX-AX4ASi only) OUT2 jack for  
recording to a CD or MiniDisc recorder.  
ꢄ Connecting digital audio sources on page 15.  
7
12V trigger jacks (total 50 mA max.) (x2)  
The OUT1 jack is also used for multi-room connections.  
Use to switch components in your system on and off  
according to the input function of the receiver.  
ꢄ Switching components on and off using the 12 volt  
trigger on page 60.  
ꢄ Multi-room listening on page 57.  
2
USB audio input (VSX-AX4ASi only)  
Use to connect your PC as an audio source.  
ꢄ Using the USB interface on page 54.  
8
Multi-room and source outputs  
Use to connect a second amplifier in a separate room.  
ꢄ Multi-room listening on page 57.  
3
Optical and coaxial digital audio inputs (x6)  
Use for digital audio sources, including DVD players/  
recorders, digital satellite receivers, CD players, etc.  
ꢄ See also The Input Setup menu on page 63 to assign  
the inputs.  
9
Component video connections (x4)  
Use the inputs to connect any video source that has  
component video output, such as a DVD recorder. Use  
the output for connection to a monitor or TV.  
4
S-400 i.LINK connectors (x2) (VSX-AX4ASi only)  
ꢄ Using the component video jacks on page 14.  
Use to connect other i.LINK audio devices for high-  
resolution, multichannel digital audio input/output.  
ꢄ Using the i.LINK interface on page 51.  
10 AM and FM antenna terminals  
Use to connect indoor or outdoor antennas for radio  
broadcasts.  
ꢄ Connecting antennas on page 19.  
10  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting your equipment  
03  
11 Composite and S-video monitor outputs  
Use to connect monitors and TVs.  
When making cable connections  
ꢄ Connecting your TV and DVD player on page 12.  
• To avoid hum, do not lay connected cables over the  
top of the receiver.  
12 Audio/video source inputs/(outputs) (x6)  
Use for connection to audio/visual sources, such as DVD  
players/recorders, VCRs, etc. Each set of inputs has jacks  
1
for composite video, S-video and stereo analog audio.  
ꢄ Connecting a DVD/HDD recorder, VCR and other video  
sources on page 13.  
13 Stereo analog audio source inputs/(outputs) (x3)  
Use for connection to audio sources such as CD players,  
tape decks, turntables, etc.  
• When connecting optical cables, be careful when  
inserting the plug not to damage the shutter  
protecting the optical socket.  
ꢄ Connecting analog audio sources on page 16.  
14 Multichannel analog audio inputs  
7.1 channel inputs for connection to a DVD player with  
multichannel analog outputs.  
ꢄ Connecting the multichannel analog inputs on  
page 53.  
15 Control input/output  
Use to connect other Pioneer components so that you  
can control all your equipment from a single IR remote  
sensor.  
• When storing optical cable, coil loosely. The cable  
may be damaged if bent around sharp corners.  
ꢄ Operating other Pioneer components with this unit’s  
sensor on page 76.  
About the video converter  
16 Multichannel pre-amplifier outputs  
Use to connect separate amplifiers for center, surround,  
surround back and subwoofer channels.  
ꢄConnecting additional amplifiers on page 56 (see also  
Installing your speaker system on page 17 for powered  
subwoofer connection).  
The video converter ensures that all video sources are  
output through all of the MONITOR VIDEO OUT jacks.  
The only exception is HDMI and high-definition  
component video: since these resolutions cannot be  
downsampled, you must connect your monitor/TV to the  
receiver’s HDMI/component video outputs when  
17 iPod input terminal  
2
connecting these video sources.  
Use to connect your Apple iPod as an audio or video  
source.  
If several video components are assigned to the same  
input function (see The Input Setup menu on page 63),  
the converter gives priority to HDMI, component, S-video,  
then composite (in that order).  
ꢄ Connecting an iPod on page 48.  
18 RS-232C connector  
Use for connection to a PC for graphical output when  
using Advanced MCACC.  
ꢄ Connecting a PC for Advanced MCACC output on  
page 62.  
• For optimal video performance, THX recommends  
switching Digital Video Conversion (in Setting the AV  
options on page 66) OFF.  
19 Speaker terminals  
Use for connection to the main front, center, surround  
and surround back speakers.  
This product incorporates copyright protection technology  
that is protected by U.S. patents and other intellectual  
property rights. Use of this copyright protection  
technology must be authorized by Macrovision  
Corporation, and is intended for home and other limited  
consumer uses only unless otherwise authorized by  
Macrovision. Reverse engineering or disassembly is  
prohibited.  
ꢄ Installing your speaker system on page 17.  
20 Voltage selector switches  
Use these to match the voltage coming into the receiver  
with the voltage in your country or region.  
ꢄ Voltage selector on page 3.  
21 AC IN inlet  
Connect the supplied power cord here.  
Note  
1 You must assign the input source to the S-video input to which you’ve connected your video component (see The Input Setup menu on page 63).  
2 If the video signal does not appear on your TV or plasma display, try adjusting the resolution settings on your component or display. Note that some  
components (such as video game units) have resolutions that may not be converted. In this case, try switching Digital Video Conversion (in Setting the AV  
options on page 66) OFF.  
11  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting your equipment  
03  
component video jacks on page 14 if your TV and/or DVD  
player has component video inputs/outputs. If your DVD  
player offers multichannel analog audio outputs, see  
Connecting the multichannel analog inputs on page 53.  
Connecting your TV and DVD player  
1
Connect the MONITOR OUT video jack to a video  
input on your TV.  
Use a standard RCA/phono jack video cable to connect to  
the composite video jack, or for higher quality video, use  
an S-video cable to connect to the S-video jack.  
TV  
2
Connect a composite or S-video output on your DVD  
player to the DVD/LD VIDEO or DVD/LD S-VIDEO input.  
Connect using a standard video cable or an S-video  
cable.  
VIDEO S-VIDEO  
IN  
IN  
1
1
3
Connect a coaxial-type digital audio output on  
your DVD player to the DIGITAL 1 (DVD/LD) input.  
Use a coaxial cable designed for digital audio.  
4
Connect the stereo audio outputs on your DVD  
MULTI-ROOM  
& SOURCE  
player to the DVD/LD AUDIO inputs.  
Connect using a stereo RCA/phono jack cable.  
IR  
MULTI-ROOM  
AUDIO  
PHONO  
ANTENNA  
AM LOOP  
&
SOURCE  
/
REC SEL  
MAIN ROOM(ZONE1)  
OUT1  
ROOM3  
(ZONE3)  
BAL 75 Ω  
S400  
IN1  
IN  
MONITOR  
OUT  
MULTI-ROOM & SOURCE  
ROOM2(ZONE2)  
(
)
AUDIO  
ROOM2(ZONE2)  
OUT  
R
L
OUT2  
CD  
IN  
IN2  
S400  
• If your DVD player has multichannel analog outputs,  
you can connect these instead. See also Connecting  
the multichannel analog inputs on page 53.  
OUT  
USB  
AUDIO  
IN  
12 V TRIGGER  
HDMI  
IN1  
DVD/  
LD  
1
2
(DC OUT 12V TOTAL 50 mA MAX)  
ROOM2  
1
2
IN  
IN  
IN  
1
SAT  
IN  
(
)
OUT  
MULTI-ROOM  
SOURCE  
&
TV  
IN  
MONITOR  
OUT  
2
IN  
(ZONE2)  
IN2  
IN3  
IN4  
OUT  
(
CD-R/  
TAPE  
DVR/  
)
VCR 1  
1
OUT  
Y
IN  
Y
)
/LD  
IN  
IN  
1
SAT  
IN  
)
IN  
R
3
IN  
(
DVR/  
)
VCR 2  
ASSIGNABLE  
FR  
F
VIDEO /  
GAME1  
IN  
4
IN  
PB  
PR  
PB  
PR  
(
)
CD-R  
1
4
SUB W.  
ASSIGNA-  
BLE  
OUT  
1
1
2
IN  
SUR-  
DVR/  
(
DVD/  
ROUND  
VCR 1  
3
2
IN  
)
IN  
LD  
IN  
Y
Y
2
CD  
IN  
R
R
(
)
OUT  
PB  
PB  
DVR/  
SURR  
VCR 2  
PR  
PR  
3
IN  
OUT  
CONTROL  
R
L
S-VIDEO  
VIDEO  
ASSIGNABLE  
1
DIGITAL  
COMPONENT VIDEO  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
VSX-AX4ASi  
OPTICAL  
COAXIAL  
S-VIDEO  
VIDEO OUT  
R
AUDIO  
L
DIGITAL OUT  
ANALOG OUT  
3
2
4
DVD player  
The diagram shows a basic setup of this receiver together  
with a TV and DVD player, with S-video or composite  
video connections. Different TVs and DVD players may  
offer alternative connections. See also Using the  
Note  
1 If your DVD player only has an optical digital output, you can connect it to one of the optical inputs on this receiver using an optical cable. When you set  
up the receiver you’ll need to tell the receiver which input you connected the player to (see The Input Setup menu on page 63).  
12  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting your equipment  
03  
Connecting a satellite/cable receiver  
or other set-top box  
Connecting a DVD/HDD recorder, VCR  
and other video sources  
Satellite and cable receivers, and terrestrial digital TV  
tuners are all examples of so-called ‘set-top boxes’.  
This receiver has two sets of audio/video inputs and  
outputs suitable for connecting analog or digital video  
devices, including DVD/HDD recorders and VCRs.  
VSX-AX4ASi  
VSX-AX4ASi  
MULTI-ROOM  
IR  
MULTI-ROOM  
SOURCE  
MAIN ROOM(ZONE1)  
AUDIO  
PHONO  
& SOURCE  
ANTENNA  
AM LOOP  
&
/
REC SEL  
OUT1  
ROOM3  
(ZONE3)  
FM UNBAL 75 Ω  
S400  
MULTI-ROOM  
IR  
MULTI-ROOM  
SOURCE  
MAIN ROOM  
(ZONE1)  
AUDIO  
PHONO  
IN1  
IN  
& SOURCE  
ANTENNA  
AM LOOP  
MULTI-ROOM & SOURCE  
&
MONITOR  
OUT  
MULTI-ROOM & SOURCE  
ROOM2(ZONE2)  
/
REC SEL  
(
)
AUDIO  
ROOM2(ZONE2)  
OUT  
R
L
OUT2  
OUT1  
ROOM3  
(ZONE3)  
FM UNBAL 75 Ω  
S400  
CD  
IN  
IN2  
IN1  
IN  
S400  
OUT  
MONITOR  
OUT  
(
)
AUDIO  
USB  
AUDIO  
IN  
ROOM2(ZONE2)  
OUT  
ROOM2(ZONE2)  
R
L
OUT2  
12 V TRIGGER  
HDMI  
IN1  
CD  
IN  
IN2  
DVD/  
LD  
S400  
OUT  
1
2
(DC OUT 12V TOTAL 50 mA MAX)  
ROOM2  
USB  
AUDIO  
IN  
2
IN  
IN  
12 V TRIGGER  
1
SAT  
HDMI  
IN1  
IN  
(
)
OUT  
MULTI-ROOM  
SOURCE  
DVD/  
LD  
1
2
&
TV  
IN  
1
2
IN  
IN  
IN  
MONITOR  
OUT  
2
1
(
)
DC OUT 12V TOTAL 50 mA MAX  
ROOM2  
IN  
IN  
(SAT)  
(ZONE2)  
IN2  
IN3  
IN4  
OUT  
(
CD-R/  
TAPE  
DVR/  
OUT  
MULTI-ROOM  
SOURCE  
MONITOR  
OUT  
)
VCR 1  
1
OUT  
Y
IN  
Y
&
TV  
IN  
1
2
(
(
)
DVD/LD  
IN  
IN  
1
SAT  
IN  
2
)
IN  
DVR/  
TV  
IN  
R
3
(
IN  
ZONE2  
)
IN2  
IN3  
IN4  
OUT  
(
CD-R/  
TAPE  
2
(
DVR/  
)
VCR 1  
1
OUT  
Y
IN  
)
VCR 2  
ASSIGNABLE  
1
2
(DVD/LD)  
IN  
IN  
1
FR  
F
SAT  
IN  
VIDEO /  
GAME1  
IN  
Y
)
IN  
R
4
3
IN  
PB  
PR  
PB  
PR  
IN  
(DVR/  
L
(
)
CD-R  
)
VCR 2  
ABLE  
1
4
SUB W.  
FR  
FL  
VIDEO /  
GAME1  
IN  
ASSIGNA-  
4
IN  
(
PB  
PB  
BLE  
OUT  
)
CD-R  
1
1
2
IN  
SUR-  
1
4
SUB W.  
CENTER  
DVR/  
(
DVD/  
ROUND  
VCR 1  
3
ASSIGNA-  
2
IN  
)
IN  
LD  
BLE  
PR  
PR  
OUT  
IN  
Y
Y
1
1
2
IN  
(
SUR-  
2
CD  
IN  
DVR/  
DVD/  
ROUND  
VCR 1  
R
R
3
(
)
2
IN  
)
LD  
IN  
IN  
Y
Y
OUT  
PB  
PB  
2
CD  
IN  
(
R
R
L
L
)
DVR/  
SURR  
VCR 2  
OUT  
PB  
PB  
PR  
PR  
3
IN  
DVR/  
SURROUND  
BACK  
VCR
OUT  
R
L
S-VIDEO  
VIDEO  
ASSIGNABLE  
1
P
R
P
R
IN  
MULTI CH  
IN  
CONTROL  
DIGITAL  
COMPONENT VIDEO  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
OUT  
R
L
S-VIDEO  
VIDEO  
ASSIGNABLE  
COMPONENT VIDEO  
1
3
CONTROL  
DIGITAL  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
DIGITAL OUT  
R
AUDIO  
L
VIDEO  
S-VIDEO  
OPTICAL COAXIAL  
R
AUDIO  
L
VIDEO  
AV OUT  
S-VIDEO  
R
AUDIO  
L
VIDEO  
S-VIDEO  
AV OUT  
DIGITAL OUT  
AV IN  
3
1
2
STB  
Connect the audio/video outputs on the set-top box  
DVR, VCR, etc.  
Connect the audio/video outputs of the video  
player/recorder to the DVR/VCR1 AUDIO and VIDEO  
inputs.  
1
to the SAT AUDIO and VIDEO inputs.  
1
Connect using a stereo RCA/phono jack cable and a  
1
video or S-video cable.  
Use a stereo RCA/phono jack audio cable for the audio  
connection and a video or S-video cable for the video  
connection.  
2
2
Connect an optical-type digital audio output from  
4
3
your set-top box to the DIGITAL 1 (SAT) input.  
Use an optical cable for the connection.  
• For a second recorder, use the DVR/VCR2 IN inputs.  
2
If the device can record, connect the DVR/VCR1  
AUDIO and VIDEO outputs to the recorder’s audio/  
video inputs.  
Use a stereo RCA/phono jack audio cable for the audio  
connection and a video or S-video cable for the video  
connection.  
Note  
1 See The Input Setup menu on page 63 to assign the S-VIDEO 2 input to the SAT input function if you make this connection.  
2 If your set-top box only has a coaxial digital output, you can connect it to one of the coaxial inputs on this receiver using a coaxial digital audio cable.  
When you set up the receiver you’ll need to tell the receiver which input you connected the set-top box to (see The Input Setup menu on page 63).  
3 If your satellite/cable receiver doesn’t have a digital audio output, you can skip this step.  
4 See The Input Setup menu on page 63 to assign the S-VIDEO 2 input to the DVR/VCR1 input function if you make this connection.  
13  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting your equipment  
03  
• For a second recorder, use the DVR/VCR2 outputs.  
1
Connect the component video outputs of your  
source to a set of ASSIGNABLE COMPONENT VIDEO  
inputs.  
Connect using a three-way component video cable.  
3
If the device can output digital audio, connect an  
1
optical-type digital audio output from the recorder to  
the DIGITAL 2 (DVR/VCR1) input.  
• Since they are assignable, it doesn’t matter which  
component video inputs you use for which source.  
After connecting everything, you’ll need to assign the  
component video inputs—see The Input Setup menu  
on page 63.  
2
Use an optical cable for the connection.  
• For a second recorder, use the DIGITAL 3 (DVR/  
VCR2) inputs.  
2
Connect the COMPONENT VIDEO OUT jacks to the  
Using the component video jacks  
component video inputs on your TV or monitor.  
Use a three-way component video cable.  
Component video should give superior picture quality  
when compared to composite or S-video. You can also  
take advantage of progressive scan video (if your source  
and TV are both compatible), which delivers a very stable,  
flicker-free picture. See the manuals that came with your  
TV and source component to check whether they are  
compatible with progressive-scan video.  
VSX-AX4ASi  
MULTI-ROOM  
IR  
MULTI-ROOM  
SOURCE  
MAIN ROOM(ZONE1)  
AUDIO  
PHONO  
& SOURCE  
ANTENNA  
AM LOOP  
&
/
REC SEL  
OUT1  
ROOM3  
(ZONE3)  
FM UNBAL 75 Ω  
S400  
IN1  
IN  
MONITOR  
OUT  
MULTI-ROOM & SOURCE  
ROOM2(ZONE2)  
(
)
AUDIO  
ROOM2(ZONE2)  
OUT  
R
L
OUT2  
CD  
IN  
IN2  
S400  
OUT  
USB  
AUDIO  
IN  
12 V TRIGGER  
HDMI  
IN1  
DVD/  
LD  
IN  
1
2
(DC OUT 12V TOTAL 50 mA MAX)  
ROOM2  
1
2
IN  
IN  
1
SAT  
IN  
(
)
OUT  
MULTI-ROOM  
SOURCE  
&
TV  
IN  
MONITOR  
OUT  
2
IN  
(ZONE2)  
IN2  
N3  
OUT  
(
CD-R/  
TAPE  
DVR/  
)
VCR 1  
1
OUT  
Y
IN  
1
2
(
(
)
DVD/LD  
IN  
IN  
1
SAT  
IN  
Y
IN  
R
I
L
VCR
ASSIG
FR  
FL  
VIDEO /  
GAME1  
IN  
4
IN  
PB  
PR  
PB  
PR  
SUB W.  
CENTER  
ASSIGNA-  
BLE  
OUT  
SUR-  
DVR/  
ROUND  
VCR 1  
3
2
IN  
)
LD  
IN  
IN  
Y
Y
2
CD  
IN  
R
R
L
L
(
)
OUT  
PB  
PB  
DVR/  
SURROUND  
BACK  
VCR 2  
PR  
PR  
3
IN  
MULTI CH  
IN  
OUT  
R
L
S-VIDEO  
VIDEO  
ASSIGNABLE  
COMPONENT VIDEO  
1
CONTROL  
DIGITAL  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
Y
PB  
PR  
2
COMPONENT  
VIDEO  
TV  
Y
PB  
PR  
COMPONENT  
VIDEO  
1
DVD player  
Note  
1 • In order to record, you must connect the analog audio cables (the digital connection is for playback only).  
• If your video component doesn’t have a digital audio output, you can skip this step.  
2 If your recorder only has a coaxial digital output, you can connect it to one of the coaxial inputs on this receiver using a coaxial digital audio cable. When  
you set up the receiver you’ll need to tell the receiver which input you connected the recorder to (see also The Input Setup menu on page 63).  
14  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting your equipment  
03  
1
1
Connect an optical-type digital audio output on  
your digital component to the DIGITAL 4 (CD-R) input.  
Use an optical cable for the connection.  
Connecting digital audio sources  
This receiver has both digital inputs and outputs,  
allowing you to connect digital audio components for  
playback and for making digital recordings.  
2
For recording equipment, connect one of the  
optical-type DIGITAL outputs to a digital input on the  
recorder.  
Most digital components also have analog connections.  
See Connecting analog audio sources on the following  
page if you want to connect these too.  
Use an optical cable to connect to the DIGITAL OUT1 or  
(VSX-AX4ASi only) OUT2 (OUT1 is shown in the  
2
illustration).  
VSX-AX4ASi  
MULTI-ROOM  
IR  
MULTI-ROOM  
SOURCE  
MAIN ROOM(ZONE1)  
AUDIO  
PHONO  
& SOURCE  
About the WMA9 Pro decoder  
ANTENNA  
AM LOOP  
&
/
REC SEL  
OUT1  
ROOM3  
(3)  
FM UNBAL 75 Ω  
S400  
IN1  
IN  
®
MONITOR  
OUT  
MULTI-ROOM & SOURCE  
ROOM2(ZONE2)  
(
)
AUDIO  
ROOM2(ZONE2)  
OUT  
This unit has an on-board Windows Media Audio 9  
R
L
O
CD  
IN  
IN2  
OUT  
USB  
AUDIO  
IN  
3
12 V TRIGGER  
DMI  
IN1  
Professional (WMA9 Pro) decoder, so it is possible to  
DVD/  
LD  
1
2
(DC OUT 12V TOTAL 50 mA MAX)  
ROOM2  
1
2
IN  
IN  
IN  
1
SAT  
IN  
playback WMA9 Pro-encoded audio using a coaxial or  
optical digital connection when connected to a WMA9  
Pro-compatible player. However, the connected PC, DVD  
player, set-top box, etc. must be able to output WMA9 Pro  
format audio signals through a coaxial or optical digital  
output.  
(
)
OUT  
MULTI-ROOM  
SOURCE  
&
TV  
IN  
MONITOR  
OUT  
2
IN  
(ZONE2)  
IN2  
IN3  
IN4  
OUT  
(
CD-R/  
TAPE  
DVR/  
)
VCR 1  
1
OUT  
Y
IN  
Y
1
2
(
(
)
DVD/LD  
IN  
IN  
1
SAT  
IN  
)
TV  
IN  
R
3
IN  
2
(
DVR/  
)
VCR 2  
ASSIGNABLE  
FR  
FL  
VIDEO /  
GAME1  
IN  
4
IN  
P
B
PB  
(
)
CD-R  
1
4
SUB W.  
CENTE  
ASSIGNA-  
BLE  
P
R
P
R
OUT  
1
1
2
IN  
SUR-  
DVR/  
(
DVD/  
ROUND  
VCR 1  
3
2
IN  
)
IN  
LD  
IN  
Y
Y
2
CD  
IN  
R
R
(
)
OUT  
P
B
PB  
DVR/  
SURROUND  
BACK  
VCR 2  
P
R
P
R
IN  
MULTI C  
IN  
OUT  
R
L
S-VIDEO  
VIDEO  
ASSIGNABLE  
COMPONENT VIDEO  
1
3
CONTROL  
DIGITAL  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
1
2
OPTICAL COAXIAL  
DIGITAL OUT  
OPTICAL  
DIGITAL IN  
CD-R, MD, DAT, etc.  
Note  
1 • If your digital component only has a coaxial digital output, you can connect it to one of the coaxial inputs on this receiver using a coaxial cable. When  
you set up the receiver you’ll need to tell the receiver which input you connected the component to (see also The Input Setup menu on page 63).  
• The digital outputs from other components can be connected to any spare digital audio inputs on this receiver. You can assign them when setting up  
the receiver (see also The Input Setup menu on page 63).  
2 • You must switch ROOM 3 ON in Using the multi-room controls on page 58 to hear audio from the DIGITAL OUT1.  
• In order to record some digital sources, you must make analog connections as explained in Connecting analog audio sources below.  
3 • Microsoft, Windows Media®, and the Windows logo are trademarks, or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other  
countries.  
• With WMA9 Pro, sound problems may occur depending on your computer system. Note that WMA9 Pro 96 kHz sources will be downsampled to 48 kHz.  
15  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting your equipment  
03  
2
Turntables only: Connect the stereo audio outputs to  
the PHONO inputs.  
• If your turntable has a grounding wire, secure it to the  
ground terminal on this receiver.  
Connecting analog audio sources  
This receiver features three stereo audio-only inputs. Two  
of these inputs have corresponding outputs for use with  
audio recorders.  
• If your turntable has line-level outputs (i.e., it has a  
built-in phono pre-amp), connect it to the CD inputs  
instead.  
One of the audio inputs (PHONO) is a dedicated  
turntable input which should not be used for any other  
type of component. This input also has a grounding  
terminal that most turntables require.  
Connecting a component to the front  
panel inputs  
2
The front panel inputs comprise a composite video jack  
(VIDEO), an S-Video jack (S-VIDEO), stereo analog audio  
inputs (AUDIO L/R) and an optical digital audio input  
(DIGITAL). You can use these connections for any kind of  
audio/video component, but they are especially  
Turntable  
convenient for portable equipment such as camcorders,  
video games and portable audio/video equipment.  
VSX-AX4ASi  
MULTI – ROOM &  
(TUNE +)  
SPEAKERS  
BAND  
VIDEO  
SELECT  
SIGNAL  
SBch  
SOURCE/REC SEL  
STEREO  
SELECT PROCESSING  
CONTROL ON/OFF  
AV  
TUNER  
EDIT  
PARAMETER  
VIDEO/GAME  
2
INPUT  
AUDIO  
PHONO  
PRE OUT  
L
ANTENNA  
AM LOOP  
MCACC  
SETUP MIC  
PHONES  
R
(ST –)  
(ST +)  
ENTER  
FRONT  
ꢀ
FM UNBAL 75 Ω  
SETUP  
RETURN  
IN  
MONITOR  
OUT  
MULTI-ROOM & SOURCE  
ROOM2(ZONE2)  
R
L
CENTER  
SUB W.  
CD  
IN  
DIGITAL IN S-VIDEO  
VIDEO  
L
AUDIO R  
(TUNE –)  
OUT  
SUR-  
ROUND  
DVD/  
LD  
1
2
IN  
IN  
IN  
SUR-  
ROUND  
BACK  
OUT  
TV  
IN  
(
)
Single  
CD-R/  
TAPE  
R
L
1
2
(
(
2
)
DVD/LD  
N
N
1
SAT  
IN  
)
TV  
IN  
R
L
ASSIGNABLE  
FR  
FL  
iPod  
SPEAKERS  
A
VIDEO /  
GAME1  
IN  
IN  
FRONT  
CE  
R
L
SU
OUT  
SUR
DVR/  
ROU
VCR 1  
IN  
R
R
L
L
DIGITAL OUT  
VIDEO/AUDIO OUTPUT  
OUT  
TV game, video camera, etc.  
DVR/  
RS-232C  
SURROUND  
BACK  
VCR 2  
IN  
MULTI CH  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
• Select these inputs using INPUT SELECT (remote) or  
the INPUT SELECTOR dial (front panel) to select  
VIDEO/GAME 2.  
R
L
S-VIDEO  
VIDEO  
CONTROL  
AUDIO  
VIDEO  
1
OUT  
PLAY  
IN  
REC  
R
L
AUDIO IN/OUT  
Tape deck, etc.  
Connect the analog audio outputs of the source  
1
component to one of the AUDIO inputs.  
Connect using a stereo RCA/phono jack audio cable.  
• If you’re connecting a tape deck, MD recorder, etc.,  
connect the analog audio outputs (OUT) to the  
analog audio inputs on the recorder.  
16  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting your equipment  
Installing your speaker system  
03  
To take full advantage of the receiver’s surround sound  
capabilities connect front, center, surround and  
main surround speakers should always be connected as  
a pair, but you can connect just one surround back  
speaker if you like (it must be connected to the left  
surround back terminal). You can use speakers with a  
nominal impedance between 6 Ω to 16 Ω (please see  
Switching the speaker impedance on page 69 if you plan  
to use speakers with an impedance of less than 8 Ω).  
surround back speakers, as well as a subwoofer.  
Although this is ideal, other configurations with fewer  
speakers—no subwoofer or no center speaker, or even  
no surround speakers—will work. At the very least, front  
left and right speakers only are necessary. Note that your  
Front  
right  
Front  
left  
Subwoofer  
Center  
CAUTION  
LINE LEVEL  
INPUT  
These speaker terminals carry  
HAZARDOUS LIVE voltage.  
To prevent the risk of electric  
shock when connecting or  
disconnecting the speaker  
cables, disconnect the power  
cord before touching any  
uninsulated parts.  
MULTI-ROOM  
& SOURCE  
IR  
MULTI-ROOM  
SOURCE  
MAIN ROOM(ZONE1)  
AUDIO  
PHONO  
PRE OUT  
L
TWO VOLTAGE  
AC IN  
ANTENNA  
AM LOOP  
&
/
REC SEL  
R
SELECTORS  
FRONT  
OUT1  
ROOM3  
(ZONE3)  
FM UNBAL 75 Ω  
S400  
IN1  
IN  
MONITOR  
OUT  
MULTI-ROOM & SOURCE  
ROOM2(ZONE2)  
(
)
AUDIO  
ROOM2(ZONE2)  
OUT  
R
L
CENTER  
OUT2  
SUB W.  
CD  
IN  
IN2  
S400  
OUT  
USB  
AUDIO  
IN  
SUR-  
12  
V
TRIGGER  
HDMI  
IN1  
ROUND  
DVD/  
LD  
1
2
(DC OUT 12V TOTAL 50 mA MAX)  
ROOM2  
1
2
IN  
IN  
IN  
SUR-  
1
SAT  
IN  
ROUND  
BACK  
(
)
OUT  
MULTI-ROOM  
SOURCE  
&
TV  
IN  
220  
110  
V
230-  
240  
120-127  
MONITOR  
OUT  
V
2
IN  
(ZONE2)  
(
)
Single  
IN2  
IN3  
IN4  
OUT  
110  
V
V
(
CD-R/  
TAPE  
DVR/  
R
L
)
1
VCR  
1
OUT  
Y
IN  
Y
1
2
(
(
)
DVD/LD  
IN  
IN  
1
SAT  
IN  
V
220  
V
)
TV  
IN  
R
120- 127  
V
230-240  
V
3
IN  
L
2
(
DVR/  
)
2
VCR  
ASSIGNABLE  
FR  
FL  
iPod  
VIDEO /  
GAME1  
IN  
SPEAKERS  
SURROUND BACK /  
4
IN  
PB  
PR  
PB  
PR  
IN  
(
)
A
CD-R  
B
FRONT  
CENTER  
SURROUND  
(
L
)
Single  
R
L
R
L
R
1
4
SUB W.  
CENTER  
ASSIGNA-  
BLE  
OUT  
1
1
2
IN  
SUR-  
DVR/  
(
DVD/  
ROUND  
VCR 1  
3
2
IN  
)
IN  
LD  
IN  
Y
Y
2
CD  
IN  
R
R
L
L
(
)
OUT  
PB  
PB  
DVR/  
RS-232C  
SURROUND  
BACK  
VCR 2  
PR  
PR  
3
IN  
MULTI CH  
IN  
SELECTABLE  
OUT  
IN  
R
L
S-VIDEO  
VIDEO  
ASSIGNABLE  
COMPONENT VIDEO  
1
CONTROL  
DIGITAL  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
VSX-AX4ASi  
Surround  
left  
Surround  
right  
Surround  
back left  
Surround  
back right  
Connecting the speakers  
Caution  
Each speaker connection on the receiver comprises a  
positive (+) and negative (–) terminal. Make sure to  
match these up with the terminals on the speakers  
themselves.  
• Make sure that all the bare speaker wire is twisted  
together and inserted fully into the speaker terminal.  
If any of the bare speaker wire touches the back panel  
it may cause the power to cut off as a safety measure.  
17  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting your equipment  
03  
• Place the center speaker above or below the TV so  
that the sound of the center channel is localized at  
the TV screen. Also, make sure the center speaker  
does not cross the line formed by the leading edge of  
the front left and right speakers.  
Bare wire connections  
Make sure that the speaker cable you’re going to use is  
properly prepared with about 10 mm of insulator stripped  
from each wire, and the exposed wire strands twisted  
together (fig. A).  
• It is best to angle the speakers towards the listening  
position. The angle depends on the size of the room.  
Use less of an angle for bigger rooms.  
To connect a terminal, unscrew the terminal a few turns  
until there is enough space to insert the exposed wire  
(fig. B). Once the wire is in position, tighten the terminal  
until the wire is firmly clamped (fig. C).  
• Surround and surround back speakers should be  
positioned 60 cm to 90 cm higher than your ears and  
titled slight downward. Make sure the speakers don't  
face each other. For DVD-Audio, the speakers should  
be more directly behind the listener than for home  
theater playback.  
fig. A  
fig. B  
fig. C  
10 mm  
• Try not to place the surround speakers farther away  
from the listening position than the front and center  
speakers. Doing so can weaken the surround sound  
effect.  
Important  
• Please refer to the manual that came with your  
speakers for details on how to connect the other end  
of the speaker cables to your speakers.  
• To achieve the best possible surround sound, install  
your speakers as shown below. Be sure all speakers  
are installed securely to prevent accidents and  
improve sound quality.  
• Other connections on page 48 provides greater detail  
on alternate speaker setups, such as using speaker  
system B (page 55), bi-amping (page 55) and bi-  
wiring (page 56).  
Front  
left  
Front  
right  
Center  
• If you are using a THX certified subwoofer use the  
THX INPUT jack on the subwoofer (if your subwoofer  
has one) or switch the filter position to THX on your  
subwoofer.  
Subwoofer  
Surround  
left  
Surround  
right  
Placing the speakers  
Where you put your speakers in the room has a big effect  
on the quality of the sound. The following guidelines  
should help you to get the best sound from your system.  
Listening position  
• The subwoofer can be placed on the floor. Ideally, the  
other speakers should be at about ear-level when  
you’re listening to them. Putting the speakers on the  
floor (except the subwoofer), or mounting them very  
high on a wall is not recommended.  
Surround back left  
Surround back right  
Single surround back speaker  
Caution  
• For the best stereo effect, place the front speakers  
2 m to 3 m apart, at equal distance from the TV.  
• Make sure that all speakers are securely installed.  
This not only improves sound quality, but also  
reduces the risk of damage or injury resulting from  
speakers being knocked over or falling in the event of  
external shocks such as earthquakes.  
• When placing speakers near the TV, we recommend  
using magnetically shielded speakers to prevent  
possible interference, such as discoloration of the  
picture when the TV is switched on. If you do not have  
magnetically shielded speakers and notice  
discoloration of the TV picture, move the speakers  
farther away from the TV.  
• If you're using a center speaker, place the front  
speakers at a wider angle. If not, place them at a  
narrower angle.  
18  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting your equipment  
03  
The diagrams below show suggested surround and  
surround back speaker orientation. The first diagram (fig.  
A) shows orientation with one surround back speaker (or  
none) connected. The second (fig. B) shows orientation  
with two surround back speakers connected.  
Connecting antennas  
The supplied antennas provide a simple way to listen to  
AM and FM radio. If you find that reception quality is  
poor, an outdoor antenna should give you better sound  
quality—see Using an external antenna to improve FM  
reception below.  
90~120  
SR  
SL  
SR  
SR  
SL  
0~60  
VSX-AX4ASi  
SL  
MULTI-ROOM  
IR  
MULTI-ROOM  
SOURCE  
MAIN ROOM(ZONE1)  
AUDIO  
PHONO  
PRE OUT  
L
SBL  
SBR  
&
SOURCE  
SBL SBR  
ANTENNA  
AM LOOP  
&
SB  
/
REC SEL  
R
FRONT  
OUT1  
ROOM3  
(ZONE3)  
FM UNBAL 75  
Ω
S400  
(AUDIO)  
IN1  
IN  
MONITOR  
OUT  
MULTI-ROOM & SOURCE  
ROOM2(ZONE2)  
ROOM2(ZONE2)  
OUT  
R
L
CENTER  
OUT2  
SUB W.  
CD  
IN  
fig. A  
fig. B  
IN2  
S400  
OUT  
USB  
AUDIO  
IN  
SUR-  
12  
V
TRIGGER  
HDMI  
IN1  
ROUND  
DVD/  
LD  
1
2
(DC OUT 12V TOTAL 50 mA MAX)  
ROOM2  
1
2
IN  
IN  
IN  
SUR-  
1
IN  
(SAT)  
ROUND  
BACK  
OUT  
MULTI-ROOM  
SOURCE  
&
TV  
IN  
• If you have two surround back speakers THX  
recommends placing them together and the same  
distance from your listening position (see below).  
MONITOR  
OUT  
2
IN  
(ZONE2)  
(Single)  
IN2  
IN3  
IN4  
OUT  
(DVR/  
CD-R/  
TAPE  
R
L
VCR 1)  
1
OUT  
Y
IN  
Y
1
2
(DVD/LD)  
(TV)  
IN  
IN  
1
SAT  
IN  
IN  
R
3
IN  
L
2
(DVR/  
VCR 2)  
ASSIGNABLE  
FR  
FL  
iPod  
SPEAKERS  
A
VIDEO /  
GAME1  
IN  
4
IN  
(CD-R)  
PB  
PR  
PB  
PR  
IN  
FRONT  
CENT  
R
L
1
4
SUB W.  
CENTER  
ASSIGNA-  
BLE  
OUT  
1
1
2
IN  
SUR-  
DVR/  
(DVD/  
ROUND  
VCR  
1
3
2
IN  
IN  
LD)  
IN  
Y
Y
2
IN  
(CD)  
R
R
L
L
THX speaker system setup  
If you have a complete THX speaker system, follow the  
diagram below to place your speakers. Note that the  
OUT  
DVR/  
PB  
PB  
RS-232C  
SURROUND  
BACK  
VCR  
2
PR  
PR  
3
IN  
MULTI CH  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
R
L
S-VIDEO  
VIDEO  
ASSIGNABLE  
1
CONTROL  
DIGITAL  
COMPONENT VIDEO  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
surround speakers ( indicates bi-polar radiating  
speakers) should output at an angle parallel to the  
listener.  
AM loop antenna  
1 Assemble the stand as shown in the illustration.  
L
C
R
fig. A  
fig. B  
fig. C  
SL  
SR  
Surround  
Surround  
• Bend the stand in the direction indicated (fig. A).  
• Clip the loop into the stand (fig. B).  
SBL  
SBR  
Surround back  
• It’s possible to fix the AM antenna to a wall (fig. C).  
Before fixing, make sure that the reception is  
satisfactory.  
• If you have two surround back speakers THX  
recommends placing them together and the same  
distance from your listening position for the following  
THX modes: THX Select2 CINEMA, THX  
2
Pull off the protective shields of both AM antenna  
wires.  
MUSICMODE and THX GAMES MODE.  
3
Press the AM LOOP antenna terminal tabs to open  
See also THX Audio Setting on page 47 to make the  
settings that will give you the best sound experience  
when using the Home THX modes (on page 29).  
and insert one wire into each terminal.  
4
Release the tabs to secure the AM antenna wires.  
5
Place the AM antenna on a flat surface and point in  
the direction giving the best reception.  
Avoid placing near computers, television sets or other  
electrical appliances and do not let it come into contact  
with metal objects.  
19  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting your equipment  
03  
3
Insert the cable as shown, then use a pair of  
Important  
pliers to wrap the end of the wire around the  
binding post. Snip off the excess wire.  
• The signal ground (ꢂ) is designed to reduce noise  
that occurs when an antenna is connected. It is not  
an electrical safety ground.  
FM wire antenna  
•
Connect the FM wire antenna to the FM UNBAL  
75 Ω in the same way as the AM antenna.  
For best results, extend the FM antenna fully and fix to a  
wall or door frame. Don’t drape loosely or leave coiled up.  
4
Use pliers to secure the cable by pinching the  
clamps together, as shown.  
Using an external antenna to improve FM  
reception  
Use an F connector to connect an external FM antenna  
using a coaxial 75 Ω cable.  
5
Push the body cover back on.  
ANTENNA  
Antenna  
adapter  
Attaching the antenna adapter  
Use the antenna adaptor to terminate the coaxial cable  
used with an external FM antenna.  
1
Cut and strip the coaxial cable to the  
specification shown in the diagram.  
Using an external antenna to improve AM  
reception  
To improve AM reception, connect a 5 m to 6 m length of  
vinyl-coated wire to the AM LOOP terminals without  
disconnecting the supplied AM loop antenna.  
Wire mesh  
Wire  
Pull back  
5
9
10 to 20 mm  
For the best possible reception, suspend horizontally  
outdoors.  
2
Open the adaptor body by pulling apart the tabs  
on either side.  
Outdoor antenna  
Tabs  
Indoor antenna  
(vinyl-coated wire)  
ANTENNA  
5 m to 6 m  
FM UNBAL 75  
Ω
AM LOOP  
20  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting your equipment  
Plugging in the receiver  
03  
1
Plug the supplied power cord into the AC IN  
socket on the back of the receiver.  
2
Plug the other end into a power outlet.  
After you’ve finished making all connections, plug the  
receiver into an AC outlet. The type of cord and the plug  
converter which can be used depends on the power  
voltage in each region or country. Please make sure you  
use the correct cord and plug converter due to the  
possibility of fire or other hazard if used incorrectly (see  
below).  
AC power cord and converter plug use  
Region  
Plug type  
For European type region  
Caution  
Do not use this power cord  
set in Singapore and  
Malaysia.  
European two-pin plug  
For regions with two pin flat-  
bladed plug  
Caution  
Do not use this power cord  
set in Taiwan.  
European two-pin plug with two-pin  
flat-bladed converter plug  
For Taiwan exclusively  
Caution  
For use in Taiwan only. In  
other areas, please do not  
use.  
Taiwanese two-pin flat-bladed plug  
Caution  
• Handle the power cord by the plug part. Do not pull  
out the plug by tugging the cord, and never touch the  
power cord when your hands are wet, as this could  
cause a short circuit or electric shock. Do not place  
the unit, a piece of furniture, or other object on the  
power cord or pinch the cord in any other way. Never  
make a knot in the cord or tie it with other cables. The  
power cords should be routed so that they are not  
likely to be stepped on. A damaged power cord can  
cause a fire or give you an electric shock. Check the  
power cord once in a while. If you find it damaged,  
ask your nearest Pioneer authorized independent  
service company for a replacement.  
• Do not use any power cord other than the one  
supplied with this unit.  
• Do not use the supplied power cord for any purpose  
other than that described below.  
• The receiver should be disconnected by removing the  
mains plug from the wall socket when not in regular  
use, e.g., when on vacation.  
• Make sure the blue ꢁ STANDBY/ON light has gone  
out before unplugging.  
21  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Controls and displays  
04  
Chapter 4:  
Controls and displays  
Front panel  
Illustration shows the VSX-AX4ASi front panel  
1
2
3
4 5  
6 7  
8
9
10  
11  
12  
AUDIO/VIDEO MULTI-CHANNEL RECEIVER VSX-AX4ASi  
STANDBY/ON  
ꢁ
PHASE  
CONTROL  
DIGITAL PRECISION  
PROCESSING  
PHASE  
CONTROL  
MCACC  
POSITION  
AUTO SURR/  
STREAM DIRECT  
HOME  
THX  
STANDARD  
SURROUND  
ADVANCED  
SURROUND  
INPUT  
SELECTOR  
MASTER  
VOLUME  
14  
15  
13  
16 17 18  
19 20  
21 22  
MULTI – ROOM &  
(TUNE +)  
ENTER  
SPEAKERS  
BAND  
VIDEO  
SELECT  
SIGNAL  
SBch  
SOURCE/REC SEL  
STEREO  
SELECT PROCESSING  
CONTROL ON/OFF  
AV  
TUNER  
EDIT  
PARAMETER  
VIDEO/GAME 2 INPUT  
MCACC  
SETUP MIC  
PHONES  
(ST –)  
(ST +)  
ꢀ
SETUP  
RETURN  
DIGITAL IN S-VIDEO  
VIDEO  
L
AUDIO R  
(TUNE –)  
23  
24  
26  
25  
27  
28  
1
INPUT SELECTOR dial  
5
Remote sensor  
Use to select an input source.  
Receives the signals from the remote control (see  
Operating range of remote control unit on page 23).  
2
ꢁ STANDBY/ON  
Switches the receiver between on and standby. Power  
indicator lights when the receiver is on.  
6
HDMI indicator  
Blinks when connecting an HDMI-equipped component;  
lights when the component is connected (page 50).  
3
PHASE CONTROL – Press to switch on/off phase  
correction (page 9).  
7
Digital Precision Processing indicator  
Lights to indicate digital processing (for example, it  
disappears when Pure Direct (page 30) is on, or when  
listening through the multichannel analog inputs).  
MCACC POSITION – Press to switch between  
MCACC presets (page 30).  
AUTO SURR / STREAM DIRECT – Press to select  
Auto Surround (page 28) or Stream Direct (page 30)  
listening.  
8
Character display  
See Display on page 24.  
4
PHASE CONTROL indicator  
Lights when Phase Control is switched on (page 9).  
22  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Controls and displays  
04  
9
MCACC indicator  
20 SIGNAL SELECT  
Lights when one of the MCACC presets (page 30) is  
selected.  
Use to select an input signal (page 31).  
21 SBch PROCESSING  
10 i.LINK indicator (VSX-AX4ASi only)  
Lights when an i.LINK-Audio-equipped component is  
selected (page 51).  
Selects the surround back channel mode (page 31) or  
virtual surround back mode (page 31).  
22 STEREO  
Switches to stereo playback (page 30).  
DIGITAL VIDEO SCALER indicator (VSX-AX2AS only)  
Lights when Resolution is set to a setting other than  
PURE (for example, when the video input signal is  
upscaled)(page 66).  
23 PHONES jack  
Use to connect headphones. When the headphones are  
connected, there is no sound output from the speakers.  
11 Listening mode buttons  
24 SETUP  
HOME THX – Press to select a Home THX listening  
mode (page 29).  
Press to access the System Setup menu (see page 35).  
25 ꢂꢃꢁꢀ (TUNE/ST +/–) /ENTER  
STANDARD SURROUND – Press for Standard  
decoding and to switch between the various 2Pro  
Logic IIx and Neo:6 options (page 28).  
Use the arrow buttons when setting up your surround  
sound system (see page 35). Use the TUNE +/– buttons  
to find radio frequencies and use ST +/– to find preset  
stations (page 33).  
ADVANCED SURROUND – Use to switch between  
the various surround modes (page 29).  
26 RETURN  
12 MASTER VOLUME dial  
Press to confirm and exit the current menu screen.  
13 Front panel controls  
To access the front panel controls, push gently on the  
lower third portion of the panel with your finger.  
27 MCACC SETUP MIC jack  
Use to connect the supplied microphone.  
28 VIDEO/GAME 2 INPUT  
See Connecting a component to the front panel inputs on  
page 16.  
ꢁ ST  
A
N
D
B
Y
/
O
N
Operating range of remote control unit  
The remote control may not work properly if:  
• There are obstacles between the remote control and  
the receiver's remote sensor.  
• Direct sunlight or fluorescent light is shining onto the  
remote sensor.  
14 SPEAKERS  
Use to change the speaker system (page 55).  
• The receiver is located near a device that is emitting  
infrared rays.  
15 AV PARAMETER  
Use to access the AV options (page 66).  
• The receiver is operated simultaneously with another  
infrared remote control unit.  
16 TUNER EDIT  
Use with ꢂ/ꢃto memorize and name stations for recall  
(page 33).  
ꢁ STA  
N
D
B
17 BAND  
Y/O  
N
Switches between AM and FM radio bands (page 33).  
A
U
D
IO  
30  
30  
/V  
ID  
EO  
M
U
L
TI  
-C  
H
A
N
N
E
L
R
E
C
E
IV  
E
R
18 MULTI ROOM & SOURCE / REC SEL controls  
If you’ve made multi-room connections (see Multi-room  
listening on page 57) use these controls to control the  
sub room from the main room (see Using the multi-room  
controls on page 58).  
7m  
You will also need to use the REC SEL controls when  
recording a source (see Making an audio or a video  
recording on page 67).  
19 VIDEO SELECT  
Press repeatedly to select the video source (page 68).  
23  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Controls and displays  
04  
Display  
1
2
3
4 5  
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
SIGNAL  
AUTO  
VIDEO CONV. V.SB DNR MIDNIGHT TUNED  
MULTI-ROOM DIALOGUE LOUDNESS STEREO  
OVER ATT Hi-bit/sampling TONE MONO  
2DIGITAL DTS  
WMA9 Pro 96/24  
DSD PCM  
L
C
S
R
SL  
SR  
dB  
HDMI  
SBL SB SBR  
LFE  
DIGITAL  
ANALOG  
STREAM DIRECT  
CD  
CD-R PHONO  
TUNER MULTI IN DVD  
iPod TV  
SAT VIDEO HDMI  
USB  
4
[
]
[
]
[
]
[
]
DVR  
1
2
3
SR+  
Neo : 6  
2
PRO LOGIC  
THX ADV.SURROUND  
STEREO  
AB  
STANDARD  
SLEEP  
SP  
12 13  
14  
15 16  
17  
TUNER indicators  
18  
1
SIGNAL indicators  
9
TUNED – Lights when a broadcast is being received.  
STEREO – Lights when a stereo FM broadcast is  
being received in auto stereo mode.  
Light to indicate the currently selected input signal.  
AUTO lights when the receiver is set to select the input  
signal automatically (page 31).  
MONO – Lights when the mono mode is set using  
2
Program format indicators  
the MPX button.  
These change according to which channels are active in  
digital sources.  
10 Master volume level  
Shows the overall volume level. –80dB indicates the  
minimum level, and +12dB indicates the maximum level.  
L – Left front channel  
C – Center channel  
R – Right front channel  
SL – Left surround channel  
S – Surround channel (mono)  
SR – Right surround channel  
SBL – Left surround back channel  
SB – Surround back channel (mono)  
SBR – Right surround back channel  
LFE – Low frequency effects channel (the ((( ))) indicators light when  
an LFE signal is being input)  
11 Input source indicators  
Light to indicate the input source you have selected.  
12 STREAM DIRECT  
Lights when Direct / Pure Direct is selected (page 30).  
13 Speaker indicators  
Indicate the current speaker system, A and/or B (page 55)  
.
14 Listening mode indicators  
3
Digital format indicators  
THX – Lights when a Home THX mode is selected.  
ADV. SURROUND – Lights when an Advanced  
Surround mode has been selected.  
STEREO – Lights when stereo listening is switched  
on (see Listening in stereo on page 30).  
STANDARD – Lights when a Standard Surround  
mode is switched on (see Listening in surround  
sound on page 28).  
Light when a signal encoded in the corresponding format  
is detected (DSDꢃPCM lights during DSD (Digital  
Stream Direct) to PCM conversion with SACDs (VSX-  
AX4ASi only)).  
4
OVER ATT  
/
OVER lights to indicate that the level of an analog source  
is too high. ATT lights when you use the attenuator  
(ANALOG ATT) to reduce it.  
15 SLEEP  
5
MULTI-ROOM  
Lights when the receiver is in sleep mode (page 69).  
Lights when the multi-room feature is active (page 57).  
16 Matrix decoding format indicators  
6
VIDEO CONV.  
2PRO LOGIC IIx – This lights to indicate 2Pro  
Logic II / 2Pro Logic IIx decoding (page 28).  
Lights when digital video conversion is switched on (see  
Setting the AV options on page 66).  
Neo:6 – When one of the Neo:6 modes of the receiver is  
on, this lights to indicate Neo:6 processing (page 28).  
7
V.SB  
Lights during Virtual surround back processing (page 31)  
.
17 Character display  
Displays various system information.  
8
Sound processing indicators  
Light according to the active AV parameter(s) (page 66).  
18 SR+  
Lights when the SR+ mode is switched on (page 61).  
24  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Controls and displays  
Remote control  
04  
3
Input source buttons  
Press to select control of other components (see  
Controlling the rest of your system on page 71).  
4
Number buttons and other receiver/component  
SYSTEM OFF  
SOURCE  
INPUT  
SELECT  
RECEIVER  
controls  
12  
13  
1
2
Use the number buttons to directly select a radio  
frequency (page 33) or the tracks on a CD, DVD, etc.  
DISC (ENTER) can be used to enter commands for TV or  
DTV, and also to select a disc in a multi-CD player.  
Press RECEIVER first to access:  
CD  
TV  
VIDEO 2  
VIDEO 1  
DVD  
SAT  
TV CONT  
SLEEP – Use to put the receiver in sleep mode and  
select the amount of time before sleep (page 69).  
DVR2  
CD-R  
i Pod  
MULTI IN  
TUNER  
ROOM2/3  
RECEIVER  
3
4
DVR1  
14  
SLEEP  
VIDEO  
SEL  
ANALOG  
ATT  
VIDEO SEL – Press repeatedly to select the video  
source (page 68).  
+
SR  
DIMMER  
S.RETRIEVER  
ANALOG ATT – Attenuates (lowers) the level of an  
analog input signal to prevent distortion (page 68).  
D.ACCESS  
CLASS  
ENTER  
+
10  
DISC  
SR+ – Switches the SR+ mode on/off (page 61).  
AV PARAMETER  
TOP MENU ì  
CH LEVEL  
MENU  
DIMMER – Dims or brightens the display (page 69).  
TUNE  
5
6
ST  
ST  
T.EDIT  
S. RETRIEVER – Press to restore CD quality sound to  
compressed audio sources (page 32).  
ì
ENTER  
RETURN  
SETUP  
ꢀ
TUNE  
GUIDEPTY SEARCH  
BAND  
Press TUNER first to access:  
TV CONTROL  
D.ACCESS – After pressing, you can access a radio  
station directly using the number buttons (page 33).  
INPUT  
TV CH  
TV VOL  
VOL  
SELECT  
15  
16  
7
8
CLASS – Switches between the three banks (classes)  
of radio station presets (page 33).  
REC  
MUTE  
A
B
MPX  
EON  
REC STOP JUKE BOX  
C
D
E
5
Tuner/component control buttons/SETUP  
AUDIO SUBTITLE HDD  
DVD  
CH  
These button controls can be accessed after you have  
selected the corresponding input source button (DVD,  
DVR1, SAT etc.). The BAND and T.EDIT tuner controls  
are explained from page 33. Press RECEIVER first to  
access the following controls:  
DISP  
CH  
PHOTO  
STATUS SIGNAL SEL  
SBch  
STEREO  
9
10  
17  
18  
MULTI OPE  
SHIFT  
THX  
STANDARD ADV. SURR  
PHASE  
MCACC  
S.DIRECT  
11  
AV PARAMETER – Use to access the AV options  
(page 66).  
RECEIVER  
SETUP – Use to access the System Setup menu  
(page 35).  
The remote has been conveniently color-coded according  
to component control using the following system (press  
the corresponding input source button to access):  
CH LEVEL – Press repeatedly to select a channel,  
then use ꢂ/ꢃ to adjust the level (page 46).  
RETURN – Press to confirm and exit the current  
menu screen (also use to return to the previous menu  
with DVDs or to select closed captioning with DTV).  
• Green – Receiver controls (see below)  
• Red – DVD controls (page 75)  
• Blue – Tuner controls (page 33)  
• Yellow – iPod controls (page 48)  
• White – Other controls (page 75)  
6
ꢂꢃꢁꢀ (TUNE/ST) /ENTER  
Use the arrow buttons when setting up your surround  
sound system (see page 35) and the AV options  
(page 66). Also used to control DVD menus/options and  
for deck 1 of a double cassette deck player. Use the TUNE  
ꢀ/ꢁ buttons to find radio frequencies and use ST ꢂ/ꢃ  
to find preset stations (page 33).  
1
RECEIVER  
ꢁ
This switches between standby and on for this receiver.  
2
INPUT SELECT  
Use to select the input source (use SHIFT for INPUT  
SELECT ).  
25  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Controls and displays  
04  
7
TV CONTROL buttons  
DIRECT F – See Direct function on page 73.  
These buttons are dedicated to control the TV assigned to  
the TV CONT button. Thus if you only have one TV to hook  
up to this system assign it to the TV CONT input source  
button. If you have two TVs, assign the main TV to the TV  
CONT button (see page 71 for more on this).  
RENAME – See Renaming input source names on  
page 73.  
ERASE – See Erasing one of the remote control button  
settings on page 72.  
RESET – See Resetting the remote control presets on  
page 72.  
TVꢁ – Use to turn on/off the power of the TV.  
TV VOL +/– – Use to adjust the volume on your TV.  
INPUT SELECT – Use to select the TV input signal.  
TV CH +/– – Use to select channels.  
READ ID – See Confirming preset codes on page 72.  
14 RECEIVER  
Switches the remote to control the receiver (used to  
select the green commands above the number buttons  
(ANALOG ATT, etc). Also use this button to set up  
surround sound (page 7, page 35). With SHIFT, this  
selects the multi-room control (page 57), shown in the  
display as RCV/RM2, RCV/RM3.  
8
Component control buttons  
The main buttons (ꢃ, ꢄ, etc.) are used to control a  
component after you have selected it using the input  
source buttons.  
The controls above these buttons can be accessed after  
you have selected the corresponding input source button  
(for example DVD, DVR1, TV or SAT). The following  
controls can be accessed when listening to the built-in  
tuner:  
15 VOL +/–  
Use to set the listening volume.  
16 MUTE  
Mutes the sound or restores the sound if it has been  
muted (adjusting the volume also restores the sound).  
MPX – Switches between stereo and mono reception  
of FM broadcasts. If the signal is weak then switching  
to mono will improve the sound quality (page 33).  
17 Receiver controls  
SIGNAL SEL – Use to select an input signal (page 31).  
DISP – Switches between named station presets and  
radio frequencies (page 34).  
SBch – Use to select the surround/virtual back  
channel mode (page 31).  
9
STATUS  
STEREO – Switches between direct and stereo  
playback. Direct playback bypasses the tone controls  
and any other signal processing for the most  
accurate reproduction of a source (page 30).  
Press to check selected receiver settings (page 69).  
10 MULTIOPE  
Use this button to perform multi operations (page 73).  
11 SHIFT  
THX – Press to select a Home THX listening mode  
Press to access the controls outlined in white boxes (for  
(page 29).  
example, INPUT SELECT  
selected input source in the remote control LCD.  
), or to display the currently  
STANDARD – Press for Standard decoding and to  
switch between the various Pro Logic IIx and Neo:6  
options (page 28).  
12 SOURCEꢁ  
Press to turn on/off other components connected to the  
receiver (see page 71 for more on this).  
ADV.SURR – Use to switch between the various  
surround modes (page 29).  
13 Character display (LCD)  
18 PHASE – Press to switch on/off phase correction  
This display shows information when transmitting  
control signals.  
(page 9).  
MCACC – Press to switch between MCACC presets  
The following commands are shown when you’re setting  
the remote to control other components (see Controlling  
the rest of your system on page 71):  
(page 30).  
S.DIRECT – Press to select Auto Surround (page 28)  
or Stream Direct (page 30) listening.  
SETUP – Indicates the setup mode, from which you  
choose the options below.  
PRESET – See Selecting preset codes directly on  
page 71.  
LEARNING – See Programming signals from other  
remote controls on page 71.  
MULTI OP – See Multi Operation and System Off on  
page 73.  
SYS OFF – See Multi Operation and System Off on  
page 73.  
26  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Controls and displays  
04  
6
DISP  
Switches between named station presets and radio  
frequencies (page 34).  
Sub remote control unit  
VSX-AX4ASi only  
7
Component control buttons  
The second remote control supplied with this receiver is  
for use with the multi-room listening feature, as  
explained on page 57. Note that you must connect a  
separate IR receiver as explained in Connecting an IR  
receiver on page 59 for remote control in your sub  
room(s).  
These are used to control a component after you have  
selected it using the input source buttons.  
8
MUTE  
Mutes the sound or restores the sound if it has been  
muted (adjusting the volume also restores the sound).  
9
Multi-room select  
Selects the room you want to control using this remote.  
RECEIVER  
HDMI  
TV  
i.LINK  
SAT  
10 T.EDIT  
1
2
MAIN  
Use with ꢂ/ꢃ to memorize and name stations for  
recall (page 33).  
DVD  
9
ROOM2  
ROOM3  
DVR1  
DVR2  
CD  
VIDEO1  
VIDEO2  
CD-R  
USB  
Selects the repeat mode of an iPod (page 48).  
MULTI IN  
PHONO  
iPod  
TUNER  
11 RETURN  
TOPMENU  
TUNE  
T.EDIT  
ST  
Press to confirm and exit the current menu screen.  
3
4
10  
BAND  
ST  
ENTER  
ꢀ
PTY  
SEARCH  
RETURN  
Switches between AM and FM radio bands (page 33).  
5
11  
12  
TUNE  
BAND  
12 CLASS  
DISP  
CLASS  
6
7
PHOTO  
Switches between the three banks (classes) of radio  
station presets (page 33).  
PHOTO  
Press to view iPod photos and video content (page 49)  
.
MUTE  
VOLUME  
13 VOLUME +/–  
Use to set the listening volume.  
13  
8
RECEIVER  
1
RECEIVER  
ꢁ
This switches between standby and on for this receiver.  
2
Input source buttons  
Press to select control of other components (see  
Controlling the rest of your system on page 71).  
3
TOP MENU  
Displays the top menu of an iPod.  
4
ꢂꢃꢁꢀ (TUNE/ST) /ENTER  
Use the arrow buttons when setting up your surround  
sound system (see page 35) and the AV options  
(page 66). Also used to control iPod menus. Use the  
TUNE ꢀ/ꢁ buttons to find radio frequencies and use  
ST ꢂ/ꢃ to find preset stations (page 33).  
5
Selects the shuffle mode of an iPod (page 48).  
27  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Listening to your system  
05  
Chapter 5:  
Listening to your system  
•
While listening to a source, press STANDARD  
Important  
(STANDARD SURROUND).  
If necessary, press repeatedly to select a listening mode.  
• The listening modes and many features described in  
this section may not be available depending on the  
current source, settings and status of the receiver.  
See Listening modes with different input signal  
formats on page 86 for more on this.  
• If the source is Dolby Digital, DTS, or Dolby Surround  
encoded, the proper decoding format will  
4
automatically be selected and shows in the display.  
With two channel sources, you can select from:  
• 2Pro Logic IIx MOVIE – Up to 7.1 channel sound,  
especially suited to movie sources  
Auto playback  
There are many ways to listen back to sources using this  
receiver, but for the simplest, most direct listening option  
is the Auto Surround feature. The receiver automatically  
detects what kind of source you’re playing and selects  
• 2Pro Logic IIx MUSIC – Up to 7.1 channel sound,  
5
especially suited to music sources  
• 2Pro Logic IIx GAME– Up to 7.1 channel sound,  
especially suited to video games  
1
multichannel or stereo playback as necessary.  
MULTI OPE  
THX  
STANDARD ADV. SURR  
• 2PRO LOGIC – 4.1 channel surround sound (sound  
from the surround speakers is mono)  
SHIFT  
PHASE  
MCACC  
S.DIRECT  
• Neo:6 CINEMA – 6.1 channel sound, especially  
suited to movie sources  
RECEIVER  
• Neo:6 MUSIC – 6.1 channel sound, especially suited  
6
•
While listening to a source, press S.DIRECT (AUTO  
to music sources  
SURR/STREAM DIRECT)2 for auto playback of a source.  
AUTO SURROUND shows briefly in the display before  
showing the decoding or playback format. Check the  
digital format indicators in the front panel display to see  
how the source is being processed.  
With multichannel sources, if you have connected  
surround back speaker(s) and have selected SBch ON, you  
can select (according to format):  
• 2Pro Logic IIx MOVIE – See above (only available  
when you’re using two surround back speakers)  
• 2Pro Logic IIx MUSIC – See above  
Listening in surround sound  
• Dolby Digital EX – Creates surround back channel  
sound for 5.1 channel sources and provides pure  
decoding for 6.1 channel sources (like Dolby Digital  
Surround EX)  
Using this receiver, you can listen to any source in surround  
sound. However, the options available will depend on your  
speaker setup and the type of source you’re listening to.  
If you connected surround back speakers, see also Using  
surround back channel processing on page 31.  
• DTS-ES – Allows you to hear 6.1 channel playback  
with DTS-ES encoded sources  
• DTS Neo:6 – Allows you to hear 6.1 channel playback  
with DTS encoded sources  
Standard surround sound  
The following modes provide basic surround sound for  
3
stereo and multichannel sources.  
MULTI OPE  
THX  
STANDARD ADV. SURR  
SHIFT  
PHASE  
MCACC  
S.DIRECT  
RECEIVER  
Note  
1 • Stereo surround (matrix) formats are decoded accordingly using Neo:6 CINEMA or 2Pro Logic IIx MOVIE (see Listening in surround sound above  
for more on these decoding formats).  
• The Auto Surround feature is canceled if you connect headphones or select the multichannel analog inputs.  
2 For more options using this button, see Using Stream Direct on page 30.  
3 In modes that give 6.1 channel sound, the same signal is heard from both surround back speakers.  
4 If surround back channel processing (page 31) is switched OFF, or the surround back speakers are set to NO (this happens automatically if the Surround  
back speaker setting on page 37 is set to anything but Normal (SB)), 2Pro Logic IIx becomes 2Pro Logic II (5.1 channel sound).  
5 When listening to 2-channel sources in Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music mode, there are three further parameters you can adjust: Center Width, Dimension,  
and Panorama. See Setting the AV options on page 66 to adjust them.  
6 When listening to 2-channel sources in Neo:6 Music mode, you can also adjust the center image effect (see Setting the AV options on page 66).  
28  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Listening to your system  
05  
Using the Home THX modes  
Using the Advanced surround effects  
The Advanced surround effects can be used for a variety  
of additional surround sound effects. Most Advanced  
Surround modes are designed to be used with film  
soundtracks, but some modes are also suited for music  
sources. Try different settings with various soundtracks  
to see which you like.  
THX and Home THX are technical standards created by  
THX Ltd. for cinema and home theater sound. Home THX  
is designed to make home theater audio sound more like  
what you hear in a cinema.  
Different THX options will be available depending on the  
source and the setting for surround back channel  
processing (see Using surround back channel processing  
on page 31 for more on this).  
STATUS SIGNAL SEL  
SBch  
STEREO  
MULTI OPE  
SHIFT  
THX  
STANDARD ADV. SURR  
STATUS SIGNAL SEL  
SBch  
STEREO  
PHASE  
MCACC  
S.DIRECT  
MULTI OPE  
SHIFT  
THX  
STANDARD ADV. SURR  
PHASE  
MCACC  
S.DIRECT  
RECEIVER  
•
Press ADV.SURR  
(
ADVANCED SURROUND  
)
RECEIVER  
2
repeatedly to select a listening mode.  
1
• ACTION – Designed for action movies with dynamic  
soundtracks  
•
Press THX  
(
HOME THX) to select a listening mode.  
With two channel sources, press THX  
(
HOME THX  
)
repeatedly to select a matrix-decoding process for the  
THX CINEMA mode (see Listening in surround sound  
above for an explanation of each process):  
• SCI-FI – Designed for science fiction with lots of  
special effects  
• DRAMA – Designed for movies with lots of dialog  
• 2Pro Logic IIx MOVIE+THX  
• 2PRO LOGIC+THX  
• MUSICAL – Creates a concert hall-type sound for  
musicals  
• Neo:6 CINEMA+THX  
• THX GAMES MODE  
• MONOFILM – Creates surround sound from mono  
soundtracks  
• 7-D THEATER – Creates an extra wide stereo field  
• CLASSICAL – Gives a large concert hall-type sound  
• CHAMBER – Creates a space with alot of reverb  
• JAZZ – Creates the sound of a small jazz club  
• ROCK – Creates a live concert sound for rock music  
• DANCE – Designed for music with lots of bass  
With multichannel sources, press THX (HOME THX)  
repeatedly to select from:  
• THX CINEMA – Gives you cinema-quality sound from  
your home theatre system using all the speakers in  
your setup  
• 2Pro Logic IIx MOVIE+THX – Especially suited to  
movie sources, this allows you to hear 7.1 channel  
playback with 5.1 channel sources  
• 7ch STEREO – Allows you to hear stereo sources  
from all the speakers in your setup  
• THX Surround EX – Allows you to hear 6.1 or 7.1  
channel playback with 5.1 channel sources  
• ADV. VIR. SURR. – A virtual surround effect using  
just the subwoofer and/or the front speakers  
• THX Select2 CINEMA – Allows you to hear 7.1  
channel playback with 5.1 channel sources  
• PhonesSurround – When listening through  
headphones, you can still get the effect of overall  
surround  
• THX MUSICMODE – Allows you to hear 7.1 channel  
playback with 5.1 channel sources  
• THX GAMES MODE – Allows you to hear 7.1 channel  
playback from the output of a video game console  
Tip  
• When an Advanced Surround listening mode is  
selected (except ADV. VIR. SURR.), the effect level  
can be adjusted using the EFFECT parameter in  
Setting the AV options on page 66.  
Note  
1 • If you only have one surround back speaker connected, 2Pro Logic IIx MOVIE+THX, THX Select2 CINEMA, THX MUSICMODE and THX GAMES  
MODE are not available.  
• You can’t use the THX modes when headphones are connected.  
2 • Depending on the source and the sound mode you have selected, you may not get sound from the surround back speakers in your setup. For more on  
this, refer to Using surround back channel processing on page 31.  
• If you press ADV. SURR when the headphones are connected, the PhonesSurround mode will automatically be selected.  
29  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Listening to your system  
Listening in stereo  
05  
Selecting MCACC presets  
When you select STEREO, you will hear the source  
through just the front left and right speakers (and  
possibly your subwoofer depending on your speaker  
settings). Dolby Digital and DTS multichannel sources  
are downmixed to stereo.  
• Default setting: MEMORY 1  
If you have calibrated your system for different listening  
2
positions , you can switch between settings to suit the  
kind of source you’re listening to and where you’re sitting  
(for example, watching movies from a sofa, or playing a  
video game close to the TV).  
PHOTO  
STATUS SIGNAL SEL  
SBch  
STEREO  
MULTI OPE  
SHIFT  
THX  
STANDARD ADV. SURR  
STATUS SIGNAL SEL  
SBch  
STEREO  
PHASE  
MCACC  
S.DIRECT  
MULTI OPE  
SHIFT  
THX  
STANDARD ADV. SURR  
PHASE  
MCACC  
S.DIRECT  
RECEIVER  
RECEIVER  
•
While listening to a source, pressSTEREO for stereo  
playback.  
•
While listening to a source, press MCACC  
(MCACC  
POSITION).  
3
Press repeatedly to select one of the six MCACC presets  
or to switch calibration off. See Data Management on  
page 43 to check and manage your current settings.  
Using Stream Direct  
Use the Stream Direct modes when you want to hear the  
truest possible reproduction of a source. All unnecessary  
signal processing is bypassed, and you’re left with the  
pure analog or digital sound source (see Stream direct  
with different input signal formats on page 88).  
STATUS SIGNAL SEL  
SBch  
STEREO  
MULTI OPE  
SHIFT  
THX  
STANDARD ADV. SURR  
PHASE  
MCACC  
S.DIRECT  
RECEIVER  
1
While listening to a source, press S.DIRECT  
(
AUTO SURR STREAM DIRECT to select the mode  
/
)
you want.  
Check the digital format indicators in the front panel  
display to see how the source is being processed.  
• AUTO SURROUND – See Auto playback on page 28.  
• DIRECT – Sources are heard according to the  
settings made in the Surround Setup (speaker  
setting, channel level, speaker distance, acoustic  
calibration EQ, and X-curve), as well as with dual  
mono, the input attenuator, and any sound delay and  
hi-bit/hi-sampling settings. You will hear sources  
according to the number of channels in the signal.  
• PURE DIRECT – Analog and PCM sources are heard  
1
without any digital processing. No sound is output  
from the Second Zone in this mode.  
Note  
1 There are cases where a brief noise is heard before playback of sources other than PCM. Please select AUTO SURROUND or DIRECT if this is a problem.  
2 Different presets might also have separate calibration settings for the same listening position, depending on how you’re using your system. These pre-  
sets can be set in Automatically setting up for surround sound (MCACC) on page 7 or Automatic MCACC (Expert) on page 35, either of which you should  
have already completed.  
3 You can’t use these settings when MULTI CH IN is switched on, and they has no effect when headphones are connected.  
30  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Listening to your system  
Choosing the input signal  
05  
The table below indicates when you will hear the  
surround back channel when playing various kinds of  
sources. (ì=Sound plays through surround back  
speaker(s))  
You need to hook up a component to both analog and  
digital inputs on the receiver to select between input  
STATUS SIGNAL SEL  
SBch  
STEREO  
1
signals.  
MULTI OPE  
SHIFT  
THX  
STANDARD ADV. SURR  
STATUS SIGNAL SEL  
SBch  
STEREO  
PHASE  
MCACC  
S.DIRECT  
MULTI OPE  
SHIFT  
THX  
STANDARD ADV. SURR  
PHASE  
MCACC  
S.DIRECT  
RECEIVER  
RECEIVER  
•
Press SBch (SBch PROCESSING) repeatedly to cycle  
the surround back channel options.  
Each press cycles through the options as follows:  
•
Press SIGNAL SEL (SIGNAL SELECT) to select the  
input signal corresponding to the source component.  
Each press cycles through the options as follows:  
• SBch ON – 6.1 or 7.1 decoding is always used (for  
example, a surround back channel will be generated  
for 5.1 encoded material)  
• AUTO – This is the default setting. The receiver  
selects the first available signal in the following  
• SBch AUTO – Automatically switches to 6.1 or 7.1  
decoding for 6.1 encoded sources (for example,  
Dolby Digital EX or DTS-ES)  
order: ; HDMI; DIGITAL; ANALOG.  
• ANALOG – Selects an analog signal.  
• DIGITAL – Selects an optical or coaxial digital signal.  
• SBch OFF – Maximum 5.1 playback  
2
• HDMI – Selects an HDMI signal.  
Using the Virtual Surround Back mode  
•
– Selects an i.LINK signal (VSX-AX4ASi only).  
When you’re not using surround back speakers,  
3
• PCM – Only PCM signals are output. The receiver  
selecting this mode allows you to hear a virtual surround  
back channel through your surround speakers. You can  
choose to listen to sources with no surround back  
channel information, or if the material sounds better in  
the format (for example, 5.1) for which it was originally  
encoded, you can have the receiver only apply this effect  
selects the first available signal in the following  
order: ; HDMI; DIGITAL.  
When set to DIGITAL or AUTO, 2DIGITAL lights with  
Dolby Digital decoding, DTS lights with DTS decoding,  
and WMA9 Pro lights to indicate decoding of a WMA9  
Pro signal.  
4
to 6.1 encoded sources like Dolby Digital EX or DTS-ES.  
The table indicates when you will hear the virtual  
surround back channel. (ì=Virtual surround back  
channel is active)  
Using surround back channel processing  
• Default setting: SBch ON  
•
Press SBch (SBch PROCESSING) repeatedly to cycle  
You can have the receiver automatically use 6.1 or 7.1  
decoding for 6.1 encoded sources (for example, Dolby  
Digital EX or DTS-ES), or you can choose to always use  
6.1 or 7.1 decoding (for example, with 5.1 encoded  
material). With 5.1 encoded sources, a surround back  
channel will be generated, but the material may sound  
better in the 5.1 format for which it was originally  
encoded (in which case, you can simply switch surround  
back channel processing off).  
the virtual surround back channel options.  
Each press cycles through the options as follows:  
• VirtualSB ON – Virtual Surround Back is always used  
(for example, on 5.1 encoded material)  
• VirtualSB AUTO – Virtual Surround Back is  
automatically applied to 6.1 encoded sources (for  
example, Dolby Digital EX or DTS-ES)  
Note  
1 • This receiver can only play back Dolby Digital, PCM (32 kHz to 96 kHz), DTS (including DTS 96 kHz/24 bit) and WMA9 Pro digital signal formats. With  
other digital signal formats, set to ANALOG (the MULTI CH IN, TUNER, PHONO and iPod input functions are all fixed to ANALOG).  
• You may get digital noise when a LD or CD player compatible with DTS is playing an analog signal. To prevent noise, make the proper digital connec-  
tions (page 15) and set the signal input to DIGITAL.  
• Some DVD players don’t output DTS signals. For more details, refer to the instruction manual supplied with your DVD player.  
• Even when i.LINK is selected and the i.LINK indicator lights, you won’t hear any sound if the output settings of your i.LINK device are off.  
• The input signal for unassigned i.LINK-equipped components is fixed to . See Checking the i.LINK inputs on page 52.  
2 When the HDMI option in Setting the AV options on page 66 is set to THROUGH, the sound will be heard through your TV, not from this receiver.  
3 • This is useful if you find there is a slight delay before AUTO recognizes the PCM signal on a CD, for instance.  
• When PCM is selected, noise may be output during playback of non-PCM sources. Please select another input signal if this is a problem.  
4 • You can’t use the Virtual Surround Back mode with headphones, or with the THX, STEREO or Stream Direct modes.  
• You can only use the Virtual Surround Back mode if the surround speakers are on and the Surr Back setting is set to NO in the Speaker Setting on  
page 45.  
• The Virtual Surround Back mode cannot be applied to sources that do not have surround channel information.  
31  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Listening to your system  
05  
• VirtualSB OFF – Virtual Surround Back mode is  
switched off  
Standard / THX  
Stereo sources  
SBch  
Processing /  
Virtual SB  
mode  
Advanced  
surround  
Type of source  
Multichannel  
sources  
2Pro Logic II x  
2Pro Logic  
Neo:6  
Dolby Digital EX/DTS-ES encoded  
multichannel sources with 6.1ch surround  
ON  
AUTO  
ON  
ì
ì
ì
ì
ì
ì
ì
ì
Dolby Digital/DTS/WMA9 Pro encoded, DVD-  
a
Audio and SACD multichannel sources  
AUTO  
ON  
b
Dolby Digital/DTS/PCM/WMA9 Pro encoded,  
ì
ì
ì
a
DVD-Audio and SACD stereo sources  
c
c
AUTO  
ON  
ì
ì
ì
ì
ì
b
Analog 2-channel (stereo) sources  
ì
ì
ì
ì
c
AUTO  
ì
a. VSX-AX4ASi only.  
b.Only applicable when using the Virtual Surround Back mode.  
c. Not applicable when using the Virtual Surround Back mode.  
Using the Sound Retriever  
When audio data is removed during the WMA/MP3/  
MPEG-4 AAC compression process, sound quality often  
suffers from an uneven sound image. The Sound  
Retriever feature employs new DSP technology that  
helps bring CD quality sound back to compressed 2-  
channel audio by restoring sound pressure and  
smoothing jagged artifacts left over after compression.  
DVD  
SAT  
VIDEO 1  
TV CONT  
DVR2  
CD-R  
i Pod  
MULTI IN  
TUNER  
ROOM2/3  
RECEIVER  
DVR1  
SLEEP  
VIDEO  
SEL  
ANALOG  
ATT  
+
SR  
DIMMER  
S.RETRIEVER  
•
Press RECEIVER then press S. RETRIEVER (SOUND  
RETRIEVER) to switch the sound retriever on or off.  
32  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the tuner  
06  
Chapter 6:  
Using the tuner  
Tuning directly to a station  
Sometimes, you'll already know the frequency of the  
station you want to listen to. In this case, you can simply  
enter the frequency directly using the number buttons on  
the remote control.  
Listening to the radio  
The following steps show you how to tune in to FM and  
AM radio broadcasts using the automatic (search) and  
manual (step) tuning functions. If you already know the  
frequency of the station you want, see Tuning directly to a  
station below. Once you are tuned to a station you can  
memorize the frequency for recall later—see Saving  
station presets on page 33 for more on how to do this.  
1
Press the TUNER button to select the tuner.  
2
Use the BAND button to change the band (FM or  
AM), if necessary.  
Each press switches the band between FM and AM.  
MPX  
EON  
REC STOP JUKE BOX  
B
C
D
E
SYSTEM OFF  
SOURCE  
INPUT  
SELECT  
3
Press D.ACCESS (Direct Access).  
RECEIVER  
D.ACCESS  
CLASS  
ENTER  
+
10  
DISC  
AUDIO SUBTITLE HDD  
DVD  
CH  
DISP  
CH  
AV PARAMETER  
TOP MENU ì  
CH LEVEL  
MENU  
PHOTO  
4
Use the number buttons to enter the frequency of  
STATUS SIGNAL SEL  
SBch  
STEREO  
TUNE  
ST  
ST  
T.EDIT  
the radio station.  
For example, to tune to 106.00 (FM), press 1, 0, 6, 0, 0.  
MULTI OPE  
SHIFT  
THX  
STANDARD ADV. SURR  
ì
ENTER  
RETURN  
SETUP  
ꢀ
TUNE  
PHASE  
MCACC  
S.DIRECT  
GUIDEPTY SEARCH  
BAND  
TV CONTROL  
CD  
TV  
VIDEO  
2
If you make a mistake halfway through, press D.ACCESS  
twice to cancel the frequency and start over.  
DVD  
SAT  
VIDEO 1  
TV CONT  
INPUT  
SELECT  
TV VOL  
TV CH  
VOL  
DVR2  
CD-R  
i Pod  
MULTI IN  
TUNER  
ROOM2/3  
RECEIVER  
DVR1  
RECEIVER  
1
2
Press the TUNER button to select the tuner.  
Use the BAND button to change the band (FM or  
Saving station presets  
If you often listen to a particular radio station, it's  
convenient to have the receiver store the frequency for  
easy recall whenever you want to listen to that station.  
This saves the effort of manually tuning in each time. This  
receiver can memorize up to 30 stations, stored in three  
banks, or classes, (A, B and C) of 10 stations each. When  
saving an FM frequency, the MPX setting (see page 33) is  
also stored.  
AM), if necessary.  
Each press switches the band between FM and AM.  
3
Tune to a station.  
There are three ways to do this:  
Automatic tuning  
To search for stations in the currently selected band,  
press and hold TUNE ꢀ/ꢁ for about a second. The  
receiver will start searching for the next station,  
stopping when it has found one. Repeat to search for  
other stations.  
MPX  
EON  
REC STOP JUKE BOX  
SYSTEM OFF  
SOURCE  
B
C
D
E
INPUT  
SELECT  
RECEIVER  
AUDIO SUBTITLE HDD  
DVD  
CH  
D.ACCESS  
CLASS  
ENTER  
+
10  
DISC  
DISP  
CH  
PHOTO  
STATUS SIGNAL SEL  
SBch  
STEREO  
AV PARAMETER  
TOP MENU ì  
CH LEVEL  
MENU  
TUNE  
Manual tuning  
To change the frequency one step at a time, press  
TUNE ꢀ/ꢁ.  
MULTI OPE  
SHIFT  
THX  
STANDARD ADV. SURR  
ST  
ST  
T.EDIT  
ì
ENTER  
RETURN  
SETUP  
PHASE  
MCACC  
S.DIRECT  
ꢀ
CD  
TV  
VIDEO  
2
TUNE  
GUIDEPTY SEARCH  
BAND  
DVD  
SAT  
VIDEO 1  
TV CONT  
TV CONTROL  
DVR2  
CD-R  
i Pod  
MULTI IN  
TUNER  
ROOM2/3  
RECEIVER  
DVR1  
INPUT  
SELECT  
TV VOL  
TV CH  
VOL  
RECEIVER  
High speed tuning  
SLEEP  
VIDEO  
ANALOG  
Press and hold TUNE ꢀ/ꢁ for high speed tuning.  
Release the button at the frequency you want.  
1
Tune to a station you want to memorize.  
See Listening to the radio on page 33 for more on this.  
Improving FM stereo sound  
2
Press T.EDIT (TUNER EDIT).  
If the TUNED or STEREO indicators don't light when  
tuning to an FM station because the signal is weak, press  
the MPX button to switch the receiver into mono  
reception mode. This should improve the sound quality  
and allow you to enjoy the broadcast.  
The display shows STATION MEMORY, then a blinking  
memory class.  
3
Press CLASS to select one of the three classes then  
press ST ꢂ/ꢃ to select the station preset you want.  
You can also use the number buttons to select a station  
preset.  
4
Press ENTER.  
After pressing ENTER, the preset class and number stop  
blinking and the receiver stores the station.  
33  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the tuner  
06  
Naming station presets  
For easier identification, you can name your station  
presets.  
1
Choose the station preset you want to name.  
See Listening to station presets below for how to do this.  
2
Press T.EDIT (TUNER EDIT).  
The display shows STATION NAME, then a blinking  
cursor at the first character position.  
3
Input the name you want.  
Choose from the following characters for a name up to  
four characters long.  
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ  
abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz  
0123456789  
!”#$%&’()∗+,–./:;<=>?@[ \ ]^_{|} ˜ [space]  
• Use the ST ꢂ/ꢃ buttons (remote) to select  
characters.  
• Press ENTER to confirm a character. If no character  
is input, a space is input.  
• The name is stored when ENTER is pressed after  
choosing the fourth character.  
Tip  
• To erase a station name, simply repeat steps 1-3 and  
input four spaces instead of a name.  
• Once you have named a station preset, you can press  
DISP when listening to a station to switch the display  
between name and frequency.  
Listening to station presets  
You will need to have some presets stored to do this. See  
Saving station presets above if you haven’t done this  
already.  
1
Press TUNER to select the tuner.  
2
Press CLASS to select the class in which the station  
is stored.  
Press repeatedly to cycle through classes A, B and C.  
3
Press ST ꢂ/ꢃ to select the station preset you want.  
• You can also use the number buttons on the remote  
control to recall the station preset.  
34  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The System Setup menu  
07  
Chapter 7:  
The System Setup menu  
• Surr Back System – Specify how you are using your  
surround back speakers (see Surround back speaker  
setting on page 37).  
Making receiver settings from the  
System Setup menu  
• Manual MCACC – Fine tune your speaker settings  
and customize the Acoustic Calibration EQ (see  
Manual MCACC setup on page 38).  
The following section shows you how to make detailed  
settings to specify how you’re using the receiver (for  
example, if you want to set up two speaker systems in  
separate rooms), and also explains how to fine-tune  
individual speaker system settings to your liking.  
• Data Management – Check your MCACC presets  
and manage them through copying, renaming or  
deleting (see Data Management on page 43).  
SYSTEM OFF  
INPUT  
• Manual SP Setup – Specify the size, number,  
distance and overall balance of the speakers you’ve  
connected (see Manual speaker setup on page 44).  
RECEIVER  
SOURCE  
SELECT  
D.ACCESS  
CLASS  
ENTER  
+
10  
DISC  
AV PARAMETER  
TOP MENU ì  
CH LEVEL  
MENU  
TUNE  
ST  
ST  
T.EDIT  
• Input Setup – Specify what you’ve connected to the  
digital and component video inputs (see The Input  
Setup menu on page 63).  
ì
ENTER  
RETURN  
SETUP  
ꢀ
TUNE  
GUIDEPTY SEARCH  
BAND  
CD  
TV  
VIDEO  
2
TV CONTROL  
DVD  
SAT  
VIDEO 1  
TV CONT  
INPUT  
TV VOL  
TV CH  
VOL  
DVR2  
CD-R  
i Pod  
MULTI IN  
TUNER  
ROOM2/3  
RECEIVER  
• Other Setup – Make customized settings to reflect  
how you are using the receiver (see The Other Setup  
menu on page 64).  
SELECT  
DVR1  
SLEEP  
VIDEO  
ANALOG  
1
Switch on the receiver and your TV.  
1
Use the ꢁ RECEIVER button to switch on.  
• If headphones are connected to the receiver,  
disconnect them.  
Automatic MCACC (Expert)  
If your setup requires more detailed settings than those  
provided in Automatically setting up for surround sound  
(MCACC) on page 7, you can customize your setup  
options below. You can calibrate your system differently  
2
Press RECEIVER on the remote control, then press  
2
the SETUP button.  
An on-screen display (OSD) appears on your TV. Use the  
ꢀ/ꢁ/ꢂ/ꢃ buttons and ENTER to navigate through the  
screens and select menu items. Press RETURN to  
confirm and exit the current menu.  
3
for up to six different MCACC presets , which are useful  
if you have different listening positions depending on the  
type of source (for example, watching movies from a sofa,  
or playing a video game close to the TV).  
4
• Press SETUP at any time to exit the System Setup  
menu.  
Important  
3
Select the setting you want to adjust.  
• Make sure the microphone and speakers are not  
moved during the Auto MCACC Setup.  
System Setup  
1.Auto MCACC  
2.Surr Back System  
3.Manual MCACC  
4.Data Management  
5.Manual SP Setup  
6.Input Setup  
• Using the Auto MCACC Setup will overwrite any  
existing settings for the MCACC preset you select.  
5
7.Other Setup  
• The screen saver will automatically appear after three  
minutes of inactivity.  
ꢀ
:
Exit  
• Auto MCACC – See Automatically setting up for  
surround sound (MCACC) on page 7 for a quick and  
effective automatic surround setup. See Automatic  
MCACC (Expert) below for a more detailed setup.  
Caution  
• The test tones used in the Auto MCACC Setup are  
output at high volume.  
Note  
1 Make sure not to switch off the power when using the System Setup menu.  
2 • Note that when editing items in the Manual MCACC menu, you will need to first specify the MCACC preset you want to adjust by pressing MCACC  
before pressing SETUP  
.
• You can’t use the System Setup menu when the iPod input source is selected (in either the main or sub room).  
3 These are stored in memory and referred to as MEMORY1–6 (or M1–6) until you rename them in Data Management on page 43.  
4 You may also want to have separate calibration settings for the same listening position, depending on how you’re using your system.  
5 Except in cases where you are only adjusting one parameter (i.e. channel level) from the Option setup screen (step 3).  
35  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The System Setup menu  
07  
5
1
Connect the microphone to the MCACC SETUP MIC  
weighting is given to any one channel. Optionally,  
jack on the front panel.  
Make sure there are no obstacles between the speakers  
and the microphone.  
FRONT ALIGN sets all speakers in accordance with  
the front speaker settings (no equalization is applied  
to the front left and right channels), and OFF (only  
available when ALL is selected) allows you to save  
calibration settings (such as speaker distance and  
channel level) with no EQ or standing wave  
MULTI  
–
ROOM  
&
(TUNE +)  
ENTER  
SPEAKERS  
BAND  
SOURCE/REC SEL  
VIDEO  
SIGNAL  
SBch  
CONTROL ON/OFF  
SELECT  
SELECT PROCESSING  
STEREO  
AV  
TUNER  
EDIT  
PARAMETER  
VIDEO/GAME  
2
INPUT  
PHONES  
MCACC  
SETUP MIC  
(ST –)  
(ST +)  
ꢀ
SETUP  
RETURN  
DIGITAL IN S-VIDEO  
VIDEO  
L
AUDIO R  
(TUNE –)  
adjustment to your selected preset.  
• Multi-Point (only available when the Auto Mode  
above is Acoustic Cal EQ or Aco Cal EQ Pro.) – In  
addition to measurements at the listening position,  
you can use two more reference points for which test  
tones will be analyzed for standing waves. This is  
useful if you want to get a balanced ‘flat’ calibration  
If you have a tripod, use it to place the microphone so that  
it’s about ear level at your normal listening position.  
Otherwise, place the microphone at ear level using a  
table or a chair.  
2
Select ‘Auto MCACC’ from the System Setup menu  
6
for several seating positions in your listening area.  
then press ENTER  
.
Place the microphone at the reference point  
indicated on-screen and note the last microphone  
placement will be at your main listening position:  
System Setup  
1.Auto MCACC  
1.Auto MCACC  
Surr Back System  
2.Surr Back System  
3.Manual MCACC  
4.Data Management  
5.Manual SP Setup  
6.Input Setup  
[
Normal (SB)  
]
]
Data Save to  
[M1. MEMORY  
1
Setting Start?  
ENTER:Next  
[OK]  
2nd reference  
3rd reference  
7.Other Setup  
[Option]  
point  
point  
ꢀ:Cancel  
ꢀ
:
Exit  
1
2
1
3
Make sure ‘Normal (SB)’ is selected, select an  
2
MCACC preset then select OK.  
3
For a fully customized Auto MCACC setup, select Option  
and set the following parameters:  
Main listening  
position  
1.Auto MCACC Option  
Auto Mode  
1. Auto MCACC Option  
1.Auto MCACC Option  
Auto Mode  
When you’re finished settings the options, press  
RETURN to go back to the Auto MCACC main setup.  
(
Back  
)
[
ALL  
]
[
Aco Cal EQ Pro.  
]
Speaker settings  
will be updated.  
EQ Type  
:
FRONT ALIGN  
EQ Type  
Data Save to  
M2. MEMORY  
OFF  
Data Save to  
[ALL CH ADJUST]  
2
Multi-Point  
NO  
4
Follow the instructions on-screen.  
THX Speaker  
NO  
EQ Type  
:
If you are using THX  
speakers, select YES.  
[
–
–
.
–
–
–
]
• Make sure the microphone is connected.  
(
Next  
)
ꢀ: Return to Auto MCACC  
ꢀ
:
Return to Auto MCACC  
ꢀ
:
Return to Auto MCACC  
• If you’re using a subwoofer, it is automatically  
detected every time you switch on the system. Make  
sure it is on and the volume is turned up.  
• Auto Mode – The default is ALL (recommended), but  
you can limit the system calibration to only one  
3
setting (to save time) if you want. The available  
• See Problems when using the Auto MCACC Setup on  
page 9 for notes regarding high background noise  
levels and other possible interference.  
4
options are ALL, ALL (Keep SPsetting), Speaker  
Setting, Channel Level, Speaker Distance,  
Acoustic Cal EQ, and Aco Cal EQ Pro.  
5
Wait for the Auto MCACC Setup to finish outputting  
• THX Speaker (only available when the Auto Mode  
above is ALL or Speaker Setting) – Select YES if you  
are using THX speakers (set all speakers to SMALL),  
otherwise leave it set to NO.  
test tones.  
A progress report is displayed on-screen while the  
receiver outputs test tones to determine the speakers  
present in your setup. Try to be as quiet as possible while  
it’s doing this.  
• EQ Type (only available when the Auto Mode above is  
Acoustic Cal EQ or Aco Cal EQ Pro.) – This  
determines how the frequency balance is adjusted.  
ALL CH ADJUST (default) is a ‘flat’ setting where all  
the speakers are set individually so no special  
• Do not adjust the volume during the test tones. This  
may result in incorrect speaker settings.  
Note  
1 If you are planning on bi-amping your front speakers, or setting up a separate speaker system in another room, read through Surround back speaker set-  
ting on page 37 and make sure to connect your speakers as necessary before continuing to step 4.  
2 The six MCACC presets are used for storing surround sound settings for different listening positions. Simply choose an unused preset for now (you can  
rename it later in Data Management on page 43).  
3 The Aco Cal EQ Pro. measurement is also taken when ALL is selected. See Professional Acoustic Calibration EQ on page 40 for more on this.  
4 The ALL (Keep SPsetting) option allows you to calibrate your system while leaving your current speaker setting (page 45) unchanged.  
5 If you selected ALL as your Auto Mode setting, you can specify the MCACC preset where you want to save the FRONT ALIGN and/or OFF settings.  
6 Switch the Multi-Point setting OFF if you only use one listening position.  
36  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The System Setup menu  
07  
• With error messages (such as Ambient Noise or  
Microphone Check) select RETRY after checking for  
ambient noise (see Problems when using the Auto  
MCACC Setup on page 9) and verifying the mic  
connection. If there doesn’t seem to be a problem,  
you can simply select OK and continue.  
8
The Auto MCACC Setup has finished! PressRETURN  
to go back to the System Setup menu.  
4a.MCACC Data Check  
1.Speaker Setting  
2.Channel Level  
3.Speaker Distance  
4.Standing Wave  
5.Acoustic Cal EQ  
6
If necessary, confirm the speaker configuration in  
ENTER:Next  
ꢀ:Return  
1
the OSD.  
The configuration shown on-screen should reflect the  
actual speakers you have.  
The settings made in the Auto MCACC Setup should give  
you excellent surround sound from your system, but it is  
also possible to adjust these settings manually using the  
1.Auto MCACC  
Now Analyzing  
1.Auto MCACC  
Check!  
2
…
(2/9)  
System Setup menu (starting on page 35).  
Front  
[
[
[
[
[
YES  
YES  
YES  
Yx2  
YES  
]
]
]
]
]
Environment Check  
Ambient Noise  
Microphone  
Center  
Surround  
SB  
You can also choose to view the settings by selecting  
individual parameters from the MCACC Data Check  
screen:  
[
[
[
OK  
]
]
]
Speaker YES/NO  
SUB W.  
[
OK  
]
ꢀ:Cancel  
ꢀ:Cancel  
• Speaker Setting – The size and number of speakers  
you’ve connected (see page 45 for more on this)  
If you see an error message (ERR) in the right side  
column (or the speaker configuration displayed isn’t  
correct), there may be a problem with the speaker  
connection. If selecting RETRY doesn’t work, turn off the  
power and check the speaker connections. If there  
doesn’t seem to be a problem, you can simply use ꢀ/ꢁ  
to select the speaker and ꢂ/ꢃ to change the setting  
(and number for surround back) and continue.  
• Channel Level – The overall balance of your speaker  
system (see page 45 for more on this)  
• Speaker Distance – The distance of your speakers  
from the listening position (see page 46 for more on  
3
this)  
• Standing Wave – Filter settings to control lower  
‘boomy’ frequencies (see page 39 for more on this)  
7
Make sure ‘OK’ is selected, then press ENTER.  
• Acoustic Cal EQ – Adjustments to the frequency  
balance of your speaker system based on the  
acoustic characteristics of your room (see page 40  
for more on this)  
A progress report is displayed on-screen while the  
receiver outputs more test tones to determine the  
optimum receiver settings for channel level, speaker  
distance, and Acoustic Calibration EQ.  
Press ENTER after you have finished checking each  
screen. When you’re finished, select RETURN to go back  
to the System Setup menu.  
1.Auto MCACC  
Now Analyzing  
Subwoofer Check  
1.Auto MCACC  
Now Analyzing  
…
…
(6/9)  
Surround Analyzing  
Speaker System  
Channel Level  
[
[
[
OK  
OK  
]
]
]
Speaker Distance  
ꢀ:Cancel  
ꢀ:Cancel  
Surround back speaker setting  
• Default setting: Normal (SB)  
Again, try to be as quiet as possible while this is  
happening. It may take 2–6 minutes.  
There are several ways you can use the surround back  
speaker channels with this system. In addition to a  
normal home theater setup where they are used for the  
surround back speakers, they can be used for bi-amping  
the front speakers or as an independent speaker system  
in another room.  
• If you selected a Multi-Point setup (in step 3), you  
will be asked to place the mic at the 2nd and 3rd  
reference points before finally placing it at your main  
listening position.  
Note  
1 This screen is only shown if you selected ALL or Speaker Setting in Auto Mode from the Auto MCACC Option menu.  
2 • Depending on the characteristics of your room, sometimes identical speakers with cone sizes of around 12 cm will end up with different size settings.  
You can correct the setting manually using the Manual speaker setup on page 44.  
• The subwoofer distance setting may be farther than the actual distance from the listening position. This setting should be accurate (taking delay and  
room characteristics into account) and generally does not need to be changed.  
3 Since the distance measurements have been set according to the sound characteristics of your speakers, there are cases where (for optimal surround  
sound) the actual distance may differ from the speaker distance setting.  
37  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The System Setup menu  
07  
1
Select ‘Surr Back System’ from the System Setup  
on page 7 if you’re unsure how to do this. Also see  
Problems when using the Auto MCACC Setup on  
page 9 for notes regarding high background noise  
levels and other possible interference.  
menu.  
See Making receiver settings from the System Setup menu  
above if you’re not already at this screen.  
• If you’re using a subwoofer, switch it on and turn up  
the volume to the middle position.  
System Setup  
1.Auto MCACC  
2.Surround Back System  
2.Surr Back System  
3.Manual MCACC  
4.Data Management  
5.Manual SP Setup  
6.Input Setup  
Surround Back System  
Normal (SB)  
1
Select ‘Manual MCACC’ from the System Setup  
menu.  
7.Other Setup  
See Making receiver settings from the System Setup menu  
on page 35 if you’re not already at this screen.  
ꢀ:Return  
ꢀ
:
Exit  
2
Select the surround back speaker setting.  
• Normal (SB) – Select for normal home theater use  
with surround back speakers in your main (speaker  
system A) setup.  
System Setup  
1.Auto MCACC  
3.Manual MCACC  
a.Fine Ch Level  
b.Fine SP Distance  
c.Standing Wave  
d.EQ Adjust  
2.Surr Back System  
3.Manual MCACC  
4.Data Management  
5.Manual SP Setup  
6.Input Setup  
e.EQ Professional  
7.Other Setup  
• 2nd Zone – Select to use the (surround back) B  
speaker terminals to listen to stereo playback in  
another room (see Second Zone speaker B setup on  
page 55).  
ꢀ
:
Exit  
ꢀ:Return  
2
Select the setting you want to adjust.  
If you’re doing this for the first time, you might want to  
make these settings in order.  
• Front Bi-Amp – Select this setting if you’re bi-  
amping your front speakers (see Bi-amping your front  
speakers on page 55).  
• Fine Ch Level – Make fine adjustments to the overall  
balance of your speaker system (see Fine Channel  
Level below).  
• Multi Room & Source – Select to use the (surround  
back) B speaker terminals for an independent system  
in another room (see Multi-room listening on  
page 57).  
• Fine SP Distance – Make precise delay settings for  
your speaker system (see Fine Speaker Distance on  
page 39).  
3
When you’re finished, press RETURN.  
• Standing Wave – Control overly resonant low  
frequencies in your listening room (see Standing  
Wave on page 39).  
You will return to the System Setup menu.  
The last two settings are specifically for customizing the  
parameters explained in Acoustic Calibration EQ on  
page 40:  
Manual MCACC setup  
You can use the settings in the Manual MCACC setup  
menu to make detailed adjustments when you’re more  
familiar with the system. Before making these settings,  
you should have already completed Automatically setting  
up for surround sound (MCACC) on page 7.  
• EQ Adjust – Manually adjust the frequency balance  
of your speaker system while listening to test tones  
(see Acoustic Calibration EQ on page 40).  
• EQ Professional – Calibrate your system based on  
the direct sound coming from the speakers and make  
detailed settings according to your room’s reverb  
characteristics (see Professional Acoustic Calibration  
EQ on page 40).  
You only need to make these settings once (unless you  
change the placement of your current speaker system or  
add new speakers).  
Caution  
Fine Channel Level  
• Default setting: 0dB (all channels)  
• The test tones used in the System Setup are output at  
high volume.  
You can achieve better surround sound by properly  
adjusting the overall balance of your speaker system. The  
following setting can help you make detailed  
adjustments that you may not achieve using the Manual  
speaker setup on page 44.  
Important  
• You will need to first specify the MCACC preset you  
want to adjust by pressing MCACC before pressing  
SETUP (step 2 in Making receiver settings from the  
System Setup menu on page 35).  
1
Select ‘Fine Ch Level’ from the Manual MCACC setup  
menu.  
• For some of the settings below, you’ll have to connect  
the setup microphone to the front panel and place it  
about ear level at your normal listening position. See  
Automatically setting up for surround sound (MCACC)  
38  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The System Setup menu  
07  
The volume increases to the 0dB reference level.  
1
Select ‘Fine SP Distance’ from the Manual MCACC  
setup menu.  
3.Manual MCACC  
3a.Fine Channel Level  
a.Fine Ch Level  
b.Fine SP Distance  
c.Standing Wave  
d.EQ Adjust  
3.Manual MCACC  
3b.Fine SP Distance  
MCACC:M1. MEMORY  
Please Wait... 20  
a.Fine Ch Level  
b.Fine SP Distance  
c.Standing Wave  
d.EQ Adjust  
1
e.EQ Professional  
Caution!  
Loud test tones  
will be output.  
L(Reference)  
e.EQ Professional  
3.0  
m
ꢀ:Cancel  
ꢀ:Return  
ꢀ:Return  
Enter:Next  
ꢀ:Cancel  
2
Adjust the level of the left channel.  
This will be the reference speaker level, so you may want  
to keep the level around 0dB so that you’ll have plenty of  
room to adjust the other speaker levels.  
2
Adjust the distance of the left channel from the  
listening position.  
3
Select each channel in turn and adjust the distance  
as necessary.  
3a.Fine Channel Level  
MCACC:M1. MEMORY  
1
Use ꢂ/ꢃto adjust the delay of the speaker you selected  
to match the reference speaker. The delay is measured in  
terms of speaker distance from 0.1 to 9.0 meters.  
L(Reference)  
+0.5dB  
3b.Fine SP Distance  
Enter:Next  
ꢀ:Cancel  
( )  
Reference  
L
3.0  
3.0  
2.5  
3.0  
3.0  
3.0  
3.0  
3.0  
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
R
[
]
C
• After pressing ENTER, test tones will be output.  
SL  
SR  
SBL  
SBR  
SW  
[
[
[
[
[
]
]
]
]
]
3
Select each channel in turn and adjust the levels (+/  
– 10dB ) as necessary.  
ꢀ:Finish  
Use ꢂ/ꢃ to adjust the volume of the speaker you  
selected to match the reference speaker. When it sounds  
like both tones are the same volume, press ꢁ to confirm  
and continue to the next channel.  
Listen to the reference speaker and use it to measure the  
target channel. From the listening position, face the two  
speakers with your arms outstretched pointing at each  
speaker. Try to make the two tones sound as if they are  
arriving simultaneously at a position slightly in front of  
3a.Fine Channel Level  
L
+0.5dB (Reference)  
R
[
0.0dB  
+1.0dB  
-3.0dB  
]
1
you and between your arm span.  
C
SL  
SR  
SBL  
SBR  
SW  
[
[
[
[
[
]
]
]
]
]
+10.0dB  
-10.0dB  
+9.5dB  
-1.5dB  
ꢀ:Finish  
• For comparison purposes, the reference speaker will  
change depending on which speaker you select.  
• If you want to go back and adjust a channel, simply  
use ꢀ/ꢁ to select it.  
When it sounds like the delay settings are matched up,  
press ꢁ to confirm and continue to the next channel.  
4
When you're finished, press RETURN.  
• For comparison purposes, the reference speaker will  
change depending on which speaker you select.  
You will return to the Manual MCACC setup menu.  
• If you want to go back and adjust a channel, simply  
use ꢀ/ꢁ to select it.  
Fine Speaker Distance  
• Default setting: 3.0 m (all speakers)  
4
When you're finished, press RETURN.  
You will return to the Manual MCACC setup menu.  
For proper sound depth and separation with your system,  
it is necessary to add a slight bit of delay to some  
speakers so that all sounds will arrive at the listening  
position at the same time. The following setting can help  
you make detailed adjustments that you may not achieve  
using the Manual speaker setup on page 44.  
Standing Wave  
• Default setting: ON  
Acoustic standing waves occur when, under certain  
conditions, sound waves from your speaker system  
resonate mutually with sound waves reflected off the  
walls in your listening area. This can have a negative  
effect on the overall sound, especially at certain lower  
Note  
1 • If you can’t seem to achieve this by adjusting the distance setting, you may need to change the angle of your speakers very slightly.  
• For better audibility, the subwoofer emits a continuous test tone (oscillating pulses are heard from your other speakers). Note that it may be difficult  
to compare this tone with the other speakers in your setup (depending on the low frequency response of the reference speaker).  
39  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The System Setup menu  
07  
frequencies. Depending on speaker placement, your  
listening position, and ultimately the shape of your room,  
it results in an overly resonant (‘boomy’) sound. The  
Standing Wave Control uses filters to reduce the effect of  
overly resonant sounds in your listening area. During  
playback of a source, you can customize the filters used  
for Standing Wave Control for each of your MCACC  
1
Select ‘EQ Adjust’ from the Manual MCACC setup  
menu.  
3.Manual MCACC  
3d.EQ Adjust  
a.Fine Ch Level  
b.Fine SP Distance  
c.Standing Wave  
d.EQ Adjust  
MCACC:M1. MEMORY  
1
[
e.EQ Professional  
Setting Start?  
OK  
]
1
ꢀ:Return  
Enter:Next  
ꢀ:Cancel  
presets.  
1
Select ‘Standing Wave’ from the Manual MCACC  
2
Confirm that the MCACC preset shown in the  
setup menu.  
display is the one you want to adjust, then select OK.  
3.Manual MCACC  
3c.Standing Wave  
MCACC M1. MEMORY  
3
Select the channel(s) you want and adjust to your  
a.Fine Ch Level  
b.Fine SP Distance  
c.Standing Wave  
d.EQ Adjust  
:
1
]
liking.  
Standing Wave Control  
[
ON  
MAIN  
Filter Ch  
e.EQ Professional  
3d.EQ Adjust  
unit:dB  
No.  
1
2
3
63Hz  
M1 125Hz  
[
[
[
[
0.0]  
0.0]  
0.0]  
0.0]  
0.0  
f
[
[
[
68Hz  
5.0  
]
]
]
[
[
[
120Hz  
5.0  
]
]
]
[
[
[
201Hz  
5.0  
]
]
]
MCACC  
Ch  
:
Q
A
T
T
[SBL] 250Hz  
500Hz  
1kHz  
0.0dB  
0.0dB  
0.0dB  
ꢀ:Return  
ꢀ:Finish  
2kHz  
4kHz  
[
[
[
[
-1.0]  
-2.0]  
-4.5]  
-7.0]  
8kHz  
16kHz  
2
Select ‘ON’ (if it is not already selected) then adjust  
TRIM [ 0.0]  
ꢀ:Finish  
the parameters for the Standing Wave Control.  
• Filter Ch – Select the channel to which you will apply  
the filter(s): Main (all except center channel and  
subwoofer), Center or SUB W. (subwoofer).  
Use the ꢂ/ꢃ buttons to select the channel.  
Use the ꢀ/ꢁ buttons to select the frequency and ꢂ/ꢃ  
to boost or cut the EQ. When you’re finished, go back to  
the top of the screen and use the ꢂ/ꢃ buttons to select  
the next channel.  
• TRIM (only available when the filter channel above is  
SUB W.) – Adjust the subwoofer channel level (to  
compensate for the difference in output post-filter).  
• The OVER! indicator shows in the display if the  
frequency adjustment is too drastic and might  
distort. If this happens, bring the level down until  
OVER! disappears from the display.  
• f / Q / ATT – These are the filter parameters where f  
represents the frequency you will be targeting and Q  
is the bandwidth (the higher the Q, the narrower the  
bandwidth, or range) of the attenuation (ATT, the  
amount of reduction to the targeted frequency).  
Tip  
3
When you're finished, press RETURN.  
You will return to the Manual MCACC setup menu.  
• Changing the frequency curve of one channel too  
drastically will affect the overall balance. If the  
speaker balance seems uneven, you can raise or  
lower channel levels using test tones with the TRIM  
feature. Use ꢀ/ꢁ to select TRIM then use ꢂ/ꢃ to  
raise or lower the channel level for the current  
speaker.  
Acoustic Calibration EQ  
Acoustic Calibration Equalization is a kind of room  
equalizer for your speakers (excluding the subwoofer). It  
works by measuring the acoustic characteristics of your  
room and neutralizing the ambient characteristics that  
can color the original source material (providing a ‘flat’  
equalization setting). If you’re not satisfied with the  
adjustment provided in Automatically setting up for  
surround sound (MCACC) on page 7 or Automatic  
MCACC (Expert) on page 35, you can also adjust these  
settings manually to get a frequency balance that suits  
your tastes.  
4
When you're finished, press RETURN.  
You will return to the Manual MCACC setup menu.  
Professional Acoustic Calibration EQ  
This setup minimizes the unwanted effects of room  
reverberation by allowing you to calibrate your system  
based on the direct sound coming from the speakers. It  
can also provide you with a graphical output of the  
2
frequency response of your room.  
Note  
1 • Since they will be overwritten, you may want to save the standing wave settings made with the Auto MCACC Setup to another MCACC preset.  
• Standing Wave control filter settings cannot be changed during playback of sources using the HDMI connection.  
2 This system allows you to customize your system calibration with the help of a graphical output that can be displayed on-screen, or using a computer  
(with software available from Pioneer—see Connecting a PC for Advanced MCACC output on page 62 for more on this).  
40  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The System Setup menu  
07  
As soon as audio is output from your speaker system, it  
is influenced by room characteristics, such as walls,  
furniture, and the dimensions of the room. The sooner  
the frequency analysis, the less it is influenced by the  
room. We recommend an earlier time setting of  
20~40ms to compensate for two major factors that will  
influence the sound of most rooms:  
How to use Professional Acoustic Calibration EQ  
If you find that lower frequencies seem overly reverberant  
in your listening room (i.e. it sounds `boomy'), or that  
different channels seem to exhibit different reverb  
characteristics, select Aco Cal EQ Pro. (or ALL) for the  
Auto Mode setting in Automatic MCACC (Expert) on  
page 35 to calibrate the room automatically. This should  
provide a balanced calibration that suits the  
• Reverberance of high vs. low frequencies –  
Depending on your room, you may find that lower  
frequencies seem overly reverberant compared to  
higher frequencies (i.e. your room sounds ‘boomy’).  
This may result in a skewed frequency analysis if the  
measurement is done too late.  
characteristics of your listening room.  
If you still aren't satisfied with the results, the manual  
Advanced EQ setup (below) provides a more customized  
calibration of your system using the direct sound of the  
speakers. This is done with the help of a graphical output  
that can be displayed on-screen, or using a computer  
(with software available from Pioneer — see Connecting  
a PC for Advanced MCACC output on page 62).  
Low  
frequencies  
Level  
High  
frequencies  
How to interpret the graphical output  
The graph shows decibels on the vertical axis and time  
(in milliseconds) on the horizontal axis. A straight line  
indicates a flat-response room (no reverb), whereas a  
sloping line indicates the presence of reverberation when  
outputting test tones. The sloping line will eventually  
flatten out when the reverberant sound stabilizes (this  
usually takes about 100 ms or so).  
Acoustic Cal. EQ Pro  
calibration range  
Standard Acoustic Cal.  
EQ calibration range  
Time  
(in msec.)  
0
80  
160  
• Reverb characteristics for different channels –  
Reverb characteristics can be somewhat different for  
each channel. Since this difference increases as the  
sound is influenced by the various room  
characteristics, it is often better to capture a  
frequency analysis early on for smoother mixing of  
channel frequencies/sounds.  
By analyzing the graph, you should be able to see how  
your room is responding to certain frequencies.  
Differences in channel level and speaker distance are  
taken into account automatically (compensation is  
provided for comparison purposes), and the frequency  
measurements can be examined both with and without  
Left  
surround  
Level  
1
the equalization performed by this receiver.  
Right  
Surround  
Setting Professional Acoustic Calibration EQ  
according to your room characteristics  
Using the manual setup, you can set the time period at  
which the frequency response is analyzed, pinpointing  
the time that is best for system calibration with your  
particular room characteristics.  
Acoustic Cal. EQ Pro  
calibration range  
Standard Acoustic Cal.  
EQ calibration range  
Time  
(in msec.)  
0
80  
160  
If your room isn’t affected by the factors above, it is often  
not necessary to make a 20~40ms setting. Later time  
settings may provide a more detailed sound experience  
with your speaker system. It is best to try and see what  
works best for your particular room.  
The graph below shows the difference between standard  
acoustic calibration and professional calibration (the  
gray circles represent the point at which the microphone  
captures the sound for frequency analysis).  
Note that changing the room (for example, moving  
furniture or paintings) will affect the calibration results.  
In such cases, you should recalibrate your system.  
Level  
Test tone  
Acoustic Cal. EQ Pro  
calibration range  
Standard Acoustic Cal.  
EQ calibration range  
Time  
(in msec.)  
0
80  
160  
Note  
1 Note that due to an effect known as ‘group delay’, lower frequencies will take longer to be generated than higher frequencies (this is most obvious when  
comparing the frequencies at 0 ms). This initial slope is not a problem (i.e. excessive reverb) with your listening room.  
41  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The System Setup menu  
07  
When the reverb measurement is finished, you can  
select Reverb View to see the results on-screen. See  
Professional Calibration EQ graphical output on page 80  
for troubleshooting information.  
Using Professional Acoustic Calibration EQ  
1
Select ‘EQ Professional’ then press ENTER.  
3.Manual MCACC  
3e.EQ Professional  
a.Fine Ch Level  
b.Fine SP Distance  
c.Standing Wave  
d.EQ Adjust  
1.Reverb Measurement  
2.Reverb View  
3.Reverb Output PC  
4.Advanced EQ Setup  
4
If you selected ‘Reverb View’, you can check the  
reverb characteristics for each channel. Press  
RETURN when you’re done.  
e.EQ Professional  
ꢀ:Return  
ENTER:Next  
ꢀ:Return  
3e2.Reverb View  
M1  
:
EQ OFF  
Ch  
Fq  
[
[
L
]
63Hz  
]
dB  
2
Select an option and press ENTER.  
• Reverb Measurement – Use this to measure the  
reverb characteristics of your room (for graphical  
output using a PC, see Connecting a PC for Advanced  
MCACC output on page 62 to connect an RS-232C  
cable before selecting this option).  
0
80  
160ms  
ꢀ:Return  
This appears according to the setting you chose in  
Reverb Measurement (step 3 above). Use the ꢂ/ꢃ  
buttons to select the channel and the frequency you want  
to check. Use the ꢀ/ꢁ buttons to go back and forth  
between the two. Note that the markers on the vertical  
axis indicate decibels in 2 dB steps.  
• Reverb View – You can check the reverb  
measurements made for specified frequency ranges  
in each channel.  
• Reverb Output PC – See Connecting a PC for  
Advanced MCACC output on page 62 for more on this.  
5
If you selected ‘Advanced EQ Setup’, input the  
• Advanced EQ Setup – Use this to select the time  
period that will be used for frequency adjustment and  
calibration, based on the reverb measurement of  
your listening area. Note that customizing system  
calibration using this setup will alter the settings you  
made in Automatically setting up for surround sound  
(MCACC) on page 7 or Automatic MCACC (Expert) on  
page 35 and is not necessary if you’re satisfied with  
these settings.  
time setting you want to use for calibration, then  
select ‘Go’. Select ‘Start’ from the next screen.  
Based on the reverb measurement above, you can  
choose the time period that will be used for the final  
frequency adjustment and calibration. Even though you  
can make this setting without reverb measurement, it is  
best to use the measurement results as a reference for  
your time setting. For an optimal system calibration  
based on the direct sound coming from the speakers, we  
recommend using the 20~40ms setting.  
3
If you selected ‘Reverb Measurement’, select EQ  
ON or OFF and then OK.  
3e4. Adv. EQ Setup (1/2)  
3e4. Adv. EQ Setup (2/2)  
Back  
Ch  
Fq  
[
[
L
]
(
)
3e1.Reverb Measurement  
3e1.Reverb Measurement  
63Hz  
]
dB  
EQ Type  
Tm [60~80ms]  
[ALL CH ADJUST]  
…
MCACC: M1.MEMORY  
1
Now Analyzing  
(1/5)  
Multi-Point  
NO  
Measure with  
EQ OFF  
[OK]  
Setting Start?  
[OK]  
M1. MEMORY  
1
EQ:ON  
OK  
Setting Start?  
Ambient Noise  
Microphone  
Speaker Level  
Delay Check  
Reverb  
[
[
[
[
]
]
]
]
0
80  
160ms  
(
Next)  
ꢀ:Cancel  
ꢀ
:
Cancel  
ꢀ:Cancel  
ꢀ:Cancel  
Use the ꢂ/ꢃ buttons to select the channel, frequency,  
and time setting. Use the ꢀ/ꢁ buttons to switch  
between them.  
You can switch between your connected speakers  
(excluding the subwoofer), and display the  
The following options determine how the reverb  
characteristics of your listening area are displayed in  
Reverb View and Reverb Output PC:  
• EQ OFF – You will see the reverb characteristics of  
your listening area without the equalization  
performed by this receiver (before calibration).  
measurements for the following frequencies: 63 Hz, 125  
Hz, 250 Hz, 500 Hz, 1 kHz, 2 kHz, 4 kHz, 8 kHz and 16 kHz.  
Select the setting from the following time periods (in  
milliseconds): 0~20ms, 10~30ms, 20~40ms, 30~50ms,  
40~60ms, 50~70ms and 60~80ms. This setting will be  
applied to all channels during calibration.  
When you’re finished, select OK. It will take about 1 to 4  
minutes for the calibration to finish.  
• EQ ON – You will see the reverb characteristics of  
your listening area with the equalization performed  
1
by this receiver (after calibration). Note that the EQ  
response may not appear entirely flat due to  
adjustments necessary for your listening area.  
After the Acoustic Calibration Equalization is set, you are  
given the option to check the settings on-screen.  
Note  
1 The calibration corresponding to the currently selected MCACC preset will be used when EQ ON is selected. To use another MCACC preset, exit the  
System Setup menu and press MCACC to select it before pressing SETUP.  
42  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The System Setup menu  
Data Management  
07  
2
3
Select the setting you want to check.  
• It is useful to do this while a source is playing so you  
can compare the different settings.  
This system allows you to store up to six MCACC presets,  
allowing you to calibrate your system for different  
listening positions (or frequency adjustments for the  
Select the MCACC preset that you want to check.  
Use the ꢀ/ꢁ buttons if necessary to switch speakers/  
settings.  
1
same listening position). This is useful for alternate  
settings to match the kind of source you’re listening to  
and where you’re sitting (for example, watching movies  
from a sofa, or playing a video game close to the TV).  
4a4.EQ Data Check  
63Hz  
M1 125Hz  
[SBL] 250Hz  
500Hz  
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
0.0  
0.0  
MCACC  
Ch  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
-1.0  
-2.0  
-4.5  
-7.0  
0.0  
1kHz  
2kHz  
From this menu you can check your current settings,  
copy from one preset to another, name presets for easier  
identification and clear any ones you don’t need.  
4kHz  
8kHz  
16kHz  
TRIM  
ꢀ:Return  
1
Select ‘Data Management’ from the System Setup  
4
Press RETURN to go back to the Data Check menu,  
menu.  
repeating steps 2 and 3 to check other settings.  
See Making receiver settings from the System Setup menu  
on page 35 if you’re not already at this screen.  
4a2.Speaker Distance  
4a3.Standing Wave  
MCACC  
L
M1. MEMORY  
1
MCACC  
M1. MEMORY  
1
3
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
2.0m  
2.0m  
2.0m  
2.5m  
3.0m  
3.0m  
2.5m  
2.3m  
Sranding Wave Control  
C
:
[
ON  
SUB W.  
System Setup  
1.Auto MCACC  
2.Surr Back System  
3.Manual MCACC  
4.Data Management  
5.Manual SP Setup  
6.Input Setup  
4.Data Management  
R
SR  
Filter Ch  
TRIM  
]
:+12.0dB  
2
a.MCACC Data Check  
b.MCACC Data Copy  
c.Memory Rename  
d.Memory Clear  
SBR  
SBL  
SL  
No.  
f
Q
1
:
:
:
110Hz  
3.0  
:
:
110Hz  
3.0  
:
:
:
110Hz  
3.0  
12.0dB  
ꢀ:Return  
A
T
T
SW  
12.0dB : 10.0dB  
ꢀ:Return  
7.Other Setup  
5
When you're finished, press RETURN.  
ꢀ
:
Exit  
ꢀ:Return  
You will return to the Data Management setup menu.  
2
Select the setting you want to adjust.  
• MCACC Data Check – Check the settings for any of  
your MCACC presets using the on-screen display  
(see Checking MCACC preset data below).  
Copying MCACC preset data  
If you want to manually adjust the Acoustic Calibration  
EQ (see Manual MCACC setup above), we recommend  
2
• MCACC Data Copy – Copy settings from one  
MCACC preset to another (see Copying MCACC  
preset data below).  
copying your current settings to an unused MCACC  
preset. Instead of just a flat EQ curve, this will give you a  
reference point from which to start.  
• Memory Rename – Name your MCACC presets for  
easy identification (see Renaming MCACC presets  
below).  
1
Select ‘MCACC Data Copy’ from the Data  
Management setup menu.  
4.Data Management  
4b.MCACC Data Copy  
From  
• Memory Clear – Clear any MCACC presets that you  
don’t want (see Clearing MCACC presets below).  
a.MCACC Data Check  
b.MCACC Data Copy  
c.Memory Rename  
d.Memory Clear  
[
M1. MEMORY 1 ]  
To  
[
M2. MEMORY 2 ]  
Start Copy  
[Cancel]  
Checking MCACC preset data  
After you have completed Automatically setting up for  
surround sound (MCACC) on page 7 or Automatic  
MCACC (Expert) on page 35, you can check your  
calibrated settings using the on-screen display.  
ꢀ:Return  
ꢀ:Cancel  
2
Select the MCACC preset you’ll be copying the  
settings ‘From’ then specify where you want to copy  
them (‘To’).  
Make sure you don’t overwrite an MCACC preset you’re  
currently using (this can’t be undone).  
1
Select ‘MCACC Data Check’ from the Data  
Management setup menu.  
4a.MCACC Data Check  
4.Data Management  
3
Select ‘Copy’ to confirm and copy the settings.  
a.MCACC Data Check  
b.MCACC Data Copy  
c.Memory Rename  
d.Memory Clear  
1.Speaker Setting  
2.Channel Level  
3.Speaker Distance  
4.Standing Wave  
5.Acoustic Cal EQ  
Copy Complete! shows in the OSD to confirm the  
MCACC preset has been copied, then you automatically  
return to the Data Management setup menu.  
ꢀ:Return  
ENTER:Next  
ꢀ:Return  
Note  
1 This can be done in Automatically setting up for surround sound (MCACC) on page 7 or Automatic MCACC (Expert) on page 35, either of which you should  
have already completed.  
2 The settings made in Automatically setting up for surround sound (MCACC) on page 7 or Automatic MCACC (Expert) on page 35.  
43  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The System Setup menu  
07  
Renaming MCACC presets  
If you have several different MCACC presets that you’re  
using, you may want to rename them for easier  
identification.  
Manual speaker setup  
This receiver allows you to make detailed settings to  
optimize the surround sound performance. You only  
need to make these settings once (unless you change the  
placement of your current speaker system or add new  
speakers).  
1
Select ‘Memory Rename’ from the Data  
Management setup menu.  
4.Data Management  
4c.Memory Rename  
These settings are designed to customize your system,  
but if you’re satisfied with the settings made in  
Automatically setting up for surround sound (MCACC) on  
page 7, it isn’t necessary to make all of these settings.  
a.MCACC Data Check  
b.MCACC Data Copy  
c.Memory Rename  
d.Memory Clear  
MCACC Position Rename  
M1  
M2  
M3  
M4  
M5  
M6  
[
[
[
[
[
[
MEMORY  
MEMORY  
MEMORY  
MEMORY  
MEMORY  
MEMORY  
1
2
3
4
5
6
]
]
]
]
]
]
ꢀ:Return  
ꢀ:Finish  
Caution  
2
Select the MCACC preset you want to rename, then  
• The test tones used in the System Setup are output at  
high volume.  
select an appropriate preset name.  
Use ꢀ/ꢁ to select the preset, then ꢂ/ꢃ to select a  
preset name.  
1
Select ‘Manual SP Setup’ then press ENTER.  
3
Repeat for as many MCACC presets as necessary,  
System Setup  
1.Auto MCACC  
5.Manual SP Setup  
then press RETURN when you're finished.  
You will return to the Data Management setup menu.  
a.Speaker Setting  
b.Channel Level  
c.Speaker Distance  
d.Bass Peak Level  
e.X-Curve  
2.Surr Back System  
3.Manual MCACC  
4.Data Management  
5.Manual SP Setup  
6.Input Setup  
f.THX Audio Setting  
7.Other Setup  
Clearing MCACC presets  
If you are no longer using one of the MCACC presets  
stored in memory, you can choose to clear the calibration  
settings of that preset.  
ꢀ
:
Exit  
ꢀ:Return  
2
Select the setting you want to adjust.  
If you are doing this for the first time, you may want to  
adjust these settings in order:  
1
Select ‘Memory Clear’ from the Data Management  
setup menu.  
• Speaker Setting – Specify the size and number of  
speakers you’ve connected (see below).  
4.Data Management  
4d.Memory Clear  
Clear  
a.MCACC Data Check  
b.MCACC Data Copy  
c.Memory Rename  
d.Memory Clear  
• Channel Level – Adjust the overall balance of your  
speaker system (page 45).  
M1. MEMORY  
1
Start Clear  
[Cancel]  
ꢀ:Cancel  
• Speaker Distance – Specify the distance of your  
speakers from the listening position (page 46).  
ꢀ:Return  
• Bass Peak Level – Prevent bass tones from distorting  
the sound from your speakers (page 46).  
2
Select the MCACC preset you want to clear.  
Make sure you don’t clear an MCACC preset you’re  
currently using (this can’t be undone).  
• X-Curve – Adjust the tonal balance of your speaker  
system for movie soundtracks (page 47).  
3
Select ‘Clear’ to confirm and clear the preset.  
• THX Audio Setting – Specify whether you are using  
a THX speaker setup (page 47).  
Clear Complete! shows in the OSD to confirm the  
MCACC preset has been cleared, then you automatically  
return to the Data Management setup menu.  
3
Make the adjustments necessary for each setting,  
pressing RETURN to confirm after each screen.  
44  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The System Setup menu  
07  
• Subwoofer – LFE signals and bass frequencies of  
channels set to SMALL are output from the  
Speaker Setting  
Use this setting to specify your speaker configuration  
(size, number of speakers and crossover frequency). It is  
a good idea to make sure that the settings made in  
Automatically setting up for surround sound (MCACC) on  
subwoofer when YES is selected. Choose the PLUS  
setting if you want the subwoofer to output bass  
sound continuously or you want deeper bass (the  
bass frequencies that would normally come out the  
front and center speakers are also routed to the  
1
page 7 are correct. Note that this setting applies to all  
MCACC presets, and cannot be set independently.  
4
subwoofer). If you did not connect a subwoofer  
choose NO (the bass frequencies are output from  
1
Select ‘Speaker Setting’ from the Manual SP Setup  
other speakers).  
menu.  
5
3
Select ‘X. OVER’ and set the crossover frequency.  
5.Manual SP Setup  
5a.Speaker Setting  
a.Speaker Setting  
b.Channel Level  
c.Speaker Distance  
d.Bass Peak Level  
e.X-Curve  
Front  
Center  
Surr  
SMALL  
SMALL ]  
SMALL ]  
SMALL x2  
YES  
Frequencies below this point will be sent to the  
subwoofer (or LARGE speakers).  
[
[
SB  
[
]
]
SUB W.  
[
[
f.THX Audio Setting  
X. OVER  
80Hz  
]
4
When you’re finished, press RETURN.  
(THX:ALL SMALL )  
You will return to the Manual SP Setup menu.  
ꢀ:Finish  
ꢀ:Return  
2
Choose the set of speakers that you want to set  
Channel Level  
then select a speaker size.  
Use ꢂ/ꢃ to select the size (and number) of each of the  
following speakers:  
Using the channel level settings, you can adjust the  
overall balance of your speaker system, an important  
factor when setting up a home theater system.  
2
• Front – Select LARGE if your front speakers  
reproduce bass frequencies effectively, or if you  
didn’t connect a subwoofer. Select SMALL to send  
the bass frequencies to the subwoofer.  
• Center – Select LARGE if your center speaker  
reproduces bass frequencies effectively, or select  
SMALL to send bass frequencies to the other  
speakers or subwoofer. If you didn’t connect a center  
speaker, choose NO (the center channel is sent to  
the front speakers).  
• Surround – Select LARGE if your surround speakers  
reproduce bass frequencies effectively. Select  
SMALL to send bass frequencies to the other  
speakers or subwoofer. If you didn’t connect  
surround speakers choose NO (the sound of the  
surround channels is sent to the front speakers or a  
subwoofer).  
1
Select ‘Channel Level’ from the Manual SP Setup  
menu.  
5.Manual SP Setup  
5b.Channel Level  
Test Tone  
a.Speaker Setting  
b.Channel Level  
c.Speaker Distance  
d.Bass Peak Level  
e.X-Curve  
Manual  
f.THX Audio Setting  
ENTER:Next  
ꢀ:Cancel  
ꢀ:Return  
2
3
Select a setup option.  
• Manual – Move the test tone manually from speaker  
to speaker and adjust individual channel levels.  
• Auto – Adjust channel levels as the test tone moves  
from speaker to speaker automatically.  
Confirm your selected setup option.  
The test tones will start after you press ENTER.  
• Surr Back – Select the number of surround back  
speakers you have (one, two or none). Select LARGE  
5b.Channel Level  
3
Test Tone  
[
.
Manual  
]
if your surround back speakers reproduce bass  
frequencies effectively. Select SMALL to send bass  
frequencies to the other speakers or subwoofer. If  
you didn’t connect surround back speakers choose  
NO.  
Setting Start  
Please Wait  
.
.
20  
Caution!  
Loud test tones  
will be output.  
ꢀ:Cancel  
Note  
1 If you’re using a THX speaker setup, set all speakers to SMALL.  
2 If you select SMALL for the front speakers the subwoofer will automatically be fixed to YES. Also, the center and surround speakers can’t be set to LARGE  
if the front speakers are set to SMALL. In this case, all bass frequencies are sent to the subwoofer.  
3 • If you selected 2nd Zone or Front Bi-Amp (in Surround back speaker setting on page 37) you can’t adjust the surround back settings.  
• If the surround speakers are set to NO, the surround back speakers will automatically be set to NO.  
• If you select one surround back speaker only, make sure that speaker is hooked up to the left surround back terminal.  
4 If you have a subwoofer and like lots of bass, it may seem logical to select LARGE for your front speakers and PLUS for the subwoofer. This may not,  
however, yield the best bass results. Depending on the speaker placement of your room you may actually experience a decrease in the amount of bass  
due low frequency cancellations. In this case, try changing the position or direction of speakers. If you can’t get good results, listen to the bass response  
with it set to PLUS and YES or the front speakers set to LARGE and SMALL alternatively and let your ears judge which sounds best. If you’re having prob-  
lems, the easiest option is to route all the bass sounds to the subwoofer by selecting SMALL for the front speakers.  
5 • This setting decides the cutoff between bass sounds playing back from the speakers selected as LARGE, or the subwoofer, and bass sounds playing  
back from those selected as SMALL. It also decides where the cutoff will be for bass sounds in the LFE channel.  
• If you’re using a THX speaker setup, confirm that the crossover frequency is set to 80Hz.  
45  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The System Setup menu  
07  
4
Adjust the level of each channel using the ꢂ/ꢃ  
Bass Peak Level  
buttons.  
Some audio sources (for example, Dolby Digital and DTS)  
include ultra-low bass tones. Set the bass limiter as  
needed to prevent the bass from distorting the sound.  
If you selected Manual, use ꢀ/ꢁto switch speakers. The  
Auto setup will output test tones in the order shown on-  
screen:  
1
Select ‘Bass Peak Level’ from the Manual SP Setup  
5b.Channel Level  
menu.  
L
0.0dB  
The current setting is displayed. When OFF is displayed  
the attenuator is off (bass output is not affected).  
C
R
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
0.0dB ]  
0.0dB ]  
0.0dB ]  
0.0dB ]  
0.0dB ]  
0.0dB ]  
0.0dB ]  
SR  
SBR  
SBL  
SL  
SW  
5.Manual SP Setup  
5d.Bass Peak Level  
a.Speaker Setting  
b.Channel Level  
c.Speaker Distance  
d.Bass Peak Level  
e.X-Curve  
Bass Peak Level  
[Setting Start  
[Setting Clear  
:OFF  
ꢀ:Finish  
]
]
Adjust the level of each speaker as the test tone is  
f.THX Audio Setting  
1
emitted.  
ꢀ:Return  
ꢀ:Return  
5
When you’re finished, press RETURN.  
You will return to the Manual SP Setup menu.  
2
Select a setup option.  
5d.Bass Peak Level  
Tip  
Bass Peak Level  
[Setting Start  
[Setting Clear  
:OFF  
]
]
• You can change the channel levels at any time by  
pressing CH LEVEL then using ꢂ/ꢃ on the remote  
control.  
Enter:Setting Start  
ꢀ:Return  
Speaker Distance  
• Setting Start – The volume is set to –60 dB, a test  
tone plays back and you make the setting.  
For good sound depth and separation from your system,  
you need to specify the distance of your speakers from  
the listening position. The receiver can then add the  
proper delay needed for effective surround sound.  
• Setting Clear – Clears any previous setting and  
switches limiting off.  
1
Select ‘Speaker Distance’ from the Manual SP Setup  
3
If you selected ‘Setting Start’, use ꢂ/ꢃ to adjust  
menu.  
the test tones and specify the bass peak level then press  
ENTER.  
5.Manual SP Setup  
5c.Speaker Distance  
a.Speaker Setting  
b.Channel Level  
c.Speaker Distance  
d.Bass Peak Level  
e.X-Curve  
L
3.0  
3.0 m ]  
3.0 m ]  
3.0  
3.0 m ]  
3.0  
3.0 m ]  
3.0 m ]  
m
5d.Bass Peak Level  
C
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
R
Bass Peak Level  
-60dB  
SR  
SBR  
SBL  
SL  
SW  
m
]
f.THX Audio Setting  
m
]
Increase the Bass  
Peak Level to  
a
comfortable volume  
ꢀ:Finish  
ꢀ:Return  
(-80dB no sound)  
=
ENTER:Finish ꢀ:Cancel  
2
Adjust the distance of each speaker using theꢂ/ꢃ  
buttons.  
Set the bass peak level gradually, then press ENTER at  
the point just before the tone starts to distort.  
2
You can adjust the distance of each speaker in 0.1 meter  
increments.  
The display on the receiver shows RESUME while the  
volume returns to its original position, then you  
automatically return to the main Bass Peak Level menu.  
3
When you’re finished, press RETURN.  
You will return to the Manual SP Setup menu.  
4
When you're finished, press RETURN  
.
Tip  
You will return to the Manual SP Setup menu.  
• For best surround sound, make sure the surround  
back speakers are the same distance from the  
listening position.  
Note  
1 • If you are using a Sound Pressure Level (SPL) meter, take the readings from your main listening position and adjust the level of each speaker to 75 dB  
SPL (C-weighting/slow reading).  
• The subwoofer test tone is output at low volumes. You may need to adjust the level after testing with an actual soundtrack.  
2 If the YES or PLUS setting on the subwoofer is selected (in Speaker Setting on page 45), the test tone will only play back from the subwoofer. If not, the  
test tone will play back from the front and surround speakers set to LARGE.  
46  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The System Setup menu  
07  
X-Curve  
THX Audio Setting  
Most soundtracks mixed for cinema sound too bright  
when played back in large rooms. The X-Curve setting  
acts as a kind of re-equalization for home theater  
listening, and restores proper tonal balance of movie  
For the most effective results when using the THX Select2  
Cinema and THX MusicMode listening modes (see Using  
the Home THX modes on page 29) with the Advanced  
Speaker Array (ASA) system (see About THX on page 85),  
it is required that you make the setting. See Placing the  
speakers on page 18 for more on THX speaker  
1
soundtracks.  
1
Select ‘X-Curve’ from the Manual SP Setup menu.  
2
placement.  
5.Manual SP Setup  
5e.X-Curve  
X-Curve  
1
Select ‘THX Audio Setting’ from the Manual SP  
a.Speaker Setting  
b.Channel Level  
c.Speaker Distance  
d.Bass Peak Level  
e.X-Curve  
-2.0dB/oct  
Setup menu.  
f.THX Audio Setting  
5.Manual SP Setup  
a.Speaker Setting  
b.Channel Level  
c.Speaker Distance  
d.Bass Peak Level  
e.X-Curve  
ꢀ:Finish  
ꢀ:Return  
f.THX Audio Setting  
2
Choose the X-Curve setting you want.  
Use ꢂ/ꢃto adjust the setting. The X-Curve is expressed  
as a downwards slope in decibels per octave, starting at  
2 kHz. The sound becomes less bright as the slope  
increases (to a maximum of -3.0dB/oct). Use the  
following guidelines to set the X-Curve according to your  
room size:  
ꢀ:Return  
2
Specify the distance of your surround back speakers  
from each other.  
5f.THX Audio Setting  
SB SP Position  
0.0-0.3m  
Room size (m2)  
≤
≤
48  
≤
60  
≤
72  
≤
≤
36  
300 1000  
SBL-SBR  
X-Curve (dB/oct) –0.5  
–1  
–1.5  
–2  
–2.5 –3  
ꢀ:Finish  
• If you select OFF, the frequency curve will be flat and  
the X-Curve has no effect.  
• 0.0 – 0.3m – Surround speakers within 30 cm apart  
(best for THX surround sound).  
3
Select ‘Return’ then press ENTER to finish.  
• > 0.3 – 1.2m – Surround speakers between 30 cm  
and 1.2 m apart.  
• 1.2m < – Surround speakers more than 1.2 m apart.  
3
When you're finished, press RETURN.  
You will return to the Manual SP Setup menu.  
Note  
1 Since the principal is the same, X-Curve isn’t applied when you’re using any of the Home THX modes (see Using the Home THX modes on page 29).  
2 If you don't have surround back speakers, or just have one, you won't be able to select this setting (Cannot select shows in the display).  
47  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Other connections  
08  
Chapter 8:  
Other connections  
1
Switch the receiver into standby then use the  
Caution  
2
supplied iPod control cable to connect your iPod to the  
iPod jack on the rear of the receiver.  
Push the connector in until you hear it click home. To  
disconnect, squeeze the connector (as shown) to release  
the catch, then pull out.  
• Make sure the power is switched off before making or  
changing the connections.  
Connecting an iPod  
2
Switch the receiver on and press the iPod input  
This receiver has a dedicated iPod terminal that will allow  
you to control playback of audio and video from your iPod  
source button to switch the receiver to the iPod.  
The front panel display shows Loading while the receiver  
verifies the connection and retrieves data from the iPod.  
1
using the controls of this receiver.  
3
Use the TOP MENU button to display iPod Top  
menu.  
Connecting your iPod to the receiver  
When the display shows Top Menu you’re ready to play  
music from the iPod.  
3
• If after pressing iPod the display shows No  
Connection, try switching off the receiver and  
reconnecting the iPod to the receiver.  
AM LO
MULTI-ROO
ROO
R
OUT  
iPod playback  
DVD/  
LD  
IN  
SUR-  
To navigate music, photos or video on your iPod it’s  
easiest if you have your TV switched on to take advantage  
ROUND  
BACK  
OUT  
TV  
IN  
(
)
Single  
CD-R/  
TAPE  
R
L
SAT  
IN  
4
IN  
R
L
of the OSDs. If you are only listening to music you can,  
FR  
FL  
iPod  
SPEAKERS  
A
VIDEO /  
GAME1  
IN  
IN  
however, use just the receiver’s front panel display to do  
everything if you prefer.  
FRONT  
CENTER  
SURROUND  
R
L
R
L
SUB W.  
CENTER  
OUT  
SUR-  
DVR/  
ROUND  
VCR 1  
IN  
R
R
L
L
OUT  
Finding what you want to play  
DVR/  
RS-232C  
SURROUND  
BACK  
VCR 2  
When connected to this receiver, you can browse music,  
photos or video stored on your iPod. When browsing  
music, you can browse by playlist, artist, album name,  
song name, genres or composers, similar to using the  
iPod directly.  
IN  
MULTI CH  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
R
L
CONTROL  
AUDIO  
iPod cable  
(1.6 m / 110 g)  
iPod  
Music  
Extras  
Settings  
Shuffle Songs  
Backlight  
>
>
>
iPod Top  
[ Playlists  
[ Artists  
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
[
Albums  
MENU  
[ Songs  
[
Genres  
ꢇ
ꢆ
[ Composers  
[ Shuffle Songs  
ꢃꢅ  
iPod  
1
Use the ꢀ/ꢁbuttons to select a category then press  
ENTER to browse that category.  
• To return to the previous level any time, press RETURN.  
Note  
1 This system is compatible with an iPod, iPod mini and iPod Photo portable device (third generation and above), however, compatibility may vary depend-  
ing on the software version of your iPod. This receiver does not support software versions prior to iPod update 2004-10-20. For supported versions, consult  
your local Pioneer dealer.  
2 • This product is the Pioneer Control Cable for use with an iPod® (third generation and above), iPod Mini or iPod Photo.  
• This cable is for connection only to the dock connector port of the iPod.  
• For detailed instructions on using the iPod, please refer to the manual supplied with the iPod.  
• The connected iPod should be updated with iPod updater software higher than version 2004-10-20.  
3 The controls of your iPod will be inoperable when connected to this receiver (Pioneer shows in the iPod display). Features such as the equalizer cannot  
be controlled using this receiver, and we recommend switching the equalizer off before connecting.  
4 • Note that non-roman characters in playlists will be displayed as #.  
• When watching video content from your iPod, you can only use the iPod controls, and the receiver OSD doesn’t appear (iPod video takes priority).  
48  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Other connections  
08  
2
Use the ꢀ/ꢁ buttons to browse the selected  
Watching photos and video content  
To view photos or video on your iPod, since video control  
is not possible using this receiver, you must use the main  
controls of your iPod instead.  
category (e.g., albums).  
• Use ꢂ/ꢃ to move to previous/next levels.  
3
Continue browsing until you arrive at what you  
1
want to play, then press  
ꢃ
to start playback.  
1
Press PHOTO to switch to the iPod controls for  
Navigation through categories on your iPod looks like  
photo and video playback.  
The receiver controls will be unavailable while you are  
watching iPod videos or browsing photos.  
this:  
Playlist ꢄ Song  
Artist ꢄ Album ꢄ Song  
Album ꢄ Song  
2
Press PHOTO again to switch back to the receiver  
Song  
controls when you’re done.  
Genre ꢄ Artist ꢄ Album ꢄ Song  
Composer ꢄ Album ꢄ Song  
Shuffle Songs  
iPod® is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc., registered in  
the U.S. and other countries.  
Tip  
• You can play all of the songs in a particular category  
by selecting the All item at the top of each category  
list. For example, you can play all the songs by a  
particular artist.  
Basic playback controls  
The following table shows the basic playback controls for  
your iPod:  
Button  
What it does  
ꢃ
Press to start playback.  
If you start playback when something other  
than a song is selected, all the songs that fall  
into that category will play.  
ꢄ
ꢅ
Press to stop playback.  
Pauses playback, or restarts playback when  
paused.  
ꢈ/ꢉ Press and hold during playback to start scanning.  
ꢇ/ꢆ Press to skip to previous/next song.  
Press repeatedly to switch between Repeat  
One, Repeat All and Repeat Off.  
Press repeatedly to switch between Shuffle  
Songs, Shuffle Albums and Shuffle Off.  
DISP  
Press repeatedly to change the song playback  
information displayed.  
ꢂ/ꢃ  
During playback, press to skip to previous/next  
playlist; when browsing, press to move to  
previous/next levels.  
TOP MENU Press to return to the iPod Top menu screen.  
RETURN Press to return to the previous level.  
Note  
1 If you’re in the song category, you can also press ENTER to start playback.  
49  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Other connections  
08  
2
Use an HDMI cable to connect the HDMI OUT  
interconnect on this receiver to an HDMI interconnect  
on a HDMI-compatible monitor.  
• The arrow on the cable connector body should be  
facing right for correct alignment with the connector  
on the player.  
Connecting using HDMI  
If you have a HDMI or DVI (with HDCP) equipped compo-  
nent, you can connect it to this receiver using a commer-  
1
cially available HDMI cable.  
The HDMI connection transfers uncompressed digital  
video, as well as almost every kind of digital audio that the  
connected component is compatible with, including  
DVD-Video, DVD-Audio (see below for limitations), Video  
CD/Super VCD, CD and MP3. See About the video  
converter on page 11 for more on HDMI compatibility.  
3
Use the INPUT SELECT button to select the HDMI  
input you’ve connected to (for example, HDMI 2).  
You can also use the front panel INPUT SELECTOR dial.  
HDMI/DVI-equipped component  
• Set the HDMI parameter in Setting the AV options on  
page 66 to THROUGH if you want to hear HDMI  
audio output from your TV or plasma display (no  
sound will be heard from this receiver).  
HDMI OUT  
MULTI-ROOM  
IR  
MULTI-ROOM  
SOURCE  
MAIN ROOM(ZONE1)  
AUDIO  
PHONO  
& SOURCE  
ANTENNA  
AM LOOP  
&
/
REC SEL  
• If the video signal does not appear on your TV or  
plasma display, try adjusting the resolution settings  
on your component or display. Note that some  
components (such as video game units) have  
resolutions that may not be converted. In this case,  
use an analog video connection.  
OUT1  
ROOM3  
(ZONE3)  
FM UNBAL 75 Ω  
S400  
IN1  
IN  
MONITOR  
OUT  
MULTI-ROOM & SOURCE  
ROOM2(ZONE2)  
(
)
AUDIO  
ROOM2(ZONE2)  
OUT  
R
L
OUT2  
CD  
IN  
IN2  
S400  
OUT  
USB  
AUDIO  
IN  
12 V TRIGGER  
HDMI  
IN1  
DVD/  
LD  
1
2
(DC OUT 12V TOTAL 50 mA MAX)  
ROOM2  
1
2
IN  
IN  
IN  
OUT  
MULTI-ROOM  
SOURCE  
&
TV  
IN  
MONITOR  
OUT  
2
IN  
(ZONE2)  
IN2  
IN3  
IN4  
OUT  
(
CD-R/  
TAPE  
DVR/  
)
VCR 1  
1
OUT  
Y
IN  
Y
1
2
(
(
)
DVD/LD  
IN  
IN  
1
SAT  
IN  
)
TV  
IN  
R
3
IN  
2
(
DVR/  
)
VCR 2  
ASSIGNABLE  
FR  
FL  
VIDEO /  
GAME1  
IN  
• You can’t hear HDMI audio through this receiver’s  
digital out jacks.  
4
IN  
PB  
PR  
PB  
PR  
(
)
CD-R  
1
4
SUB W.  
C
ASSIGNA-  
BLE  
OUT  
1
1
2
IN  
SUR-  
DVR/  
(
DVD/  
ROUND  
VCR 1  
3
2
IN  
)
IN  
LD  
IN  
Y
Y
2
CD  
IN  
R
R
(
)
OUT  
PB  
PB  
DVR/  
SURROUN  
BAC  
About HDMI  
VCR 2  
PR  
PR  
3
IN  
MUL  
IN  
OUT  
CONTROL  
HDMI (High Definition Multimedia Interface) supports  
both video and audio on a single digital connection for  
use with DVD players, DTV, set-top boxes, and other AV  
devices. HDMI was developed to provide the technolo-  
gies of High Bandwidth Digital Content Protection  
(HDCP) as well as Digital Visual Interface (DVI) in one  
specification. HDCP is used to protect digital content  
transmitted and received by DVI-compliant displays.  
R
L
S-VIDEO  
VIDEO  
ASSIGNABLE  
1
DIGITAL  
COMPONENT VIDEO  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
VSX-AX4ASi  
HDMI has the capability to support standard, enhanced,  
or high-definition video plus standard to multi-channel  
surround-sound audio. HDMI features include uncom-  
pressed digital video, a bandwidth of up to 2.2 gigabytes  
per second (with HDTV signals), one connector (instead  
of several cables and connectors), and communication  
between the AV source and AV devices such as DTVs.  
HDMI IN  
HDMI/DVI-compatible monitor  
or plasma display  
1
Use an HDMI cable to connect the HDMI IN  
interconnect on this receiver to an HDMI output on your  
HDMI component.  
HDMI appears on the front panel when an HDMI-  
equipped component is connected.  
HDMI, the  
logo and High-Definition Multi-  
media Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of  
HDMI licensing LLC.  
Note  
1 • An HDMI connection can only be made with DVI-equipped components compatible with both DVI and High Bandwidth Digital Content Protection  
(HDCP). If you choose to connect to a DVI connector, you will need a separate adaptor (DVIꢄHDMI) to do so. A DVI connection, however, does not support  
audio signals. Consult your local audio dealer for more information.  
• This unit has been designed to be compliant with HDMI (High Definition Multimedia Interface) Version 1.2. Depending on the component you have  
connected, using a DVI connection may result in unreliable signal transfers. Also, when using a component with HDMI version 1.0, it is not possible to  
output copy-controlled DVD-Audio CPPM sources from the HDMI connection.  
50  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Other connections  
08  
1
Use an i.LINK cable to connect one of the i.LINK  
connectors on this receiver to an i.LINK connector on  
your i.LINK component.  
Using the i.LINK interface  
VSX-AX4ASi only  
If you have a component with an i.LINK connector, you  
can connect it to this receiver using an i.LINK cable.  
MULTI-ROOM  
IR  
MULTI-ROOM  
SOURCE  
MAIN ROOM(ZONE1)  
AUDIO  
PHONO  
&
SOURCE  
ANTENNA  
AM LOOP  
&
/
REC SEL  
OUT1  
ROOM3  
(ZONE3)  
FM UNBAL 75  
Ω
S400  
IN1  
IN2  
IN  
(
)
MONITOR  
OUT  
MULTI-ROOM & SOURCE  
ROOM2(ZONE2)  
AUDIO  
Since the i.LINK interface does not transmit video  
signals, the video signal of i.LINK-connected compo-  
nents must be connected with other cables (see  
Connecting your equipment on page 10 for more on  
making video connections). If you’ve already hooked up  
the video signal from the component, assign the i.LINK  
input to the input function to which you’ve connected the  
video signals (see The Input Setup menu on page 63). See  
Checking the i.LINK inputs below to confirm your i.LINK  
settings.  
ROOM2  
(ZONE2)  
OUT  
R
L
OUT2  
CD  
IN  
S400  
OUT  
USB  
AUDIO  
IN  
12  
V
TRIGGER  
IN1  
DVD/  
LD  
2
(DC OT 12V TOTAL 50 mA MAX)  
ROOM2  
1
2
IN  
IN  
IN  
1
IN  
(SAT)  
OUT  
MULTI-ROOM  
SOURCE  
&
TV  
IN  
MONITOR  
OUT  
2
IN  
(DVR/  
(ZONE2)  
IN2  
IN3  
IN4  
OUT  
CD-R/  
TAPE  
)
1
VCR  
1
OUT  
Y
IN  
Y
1
2
(DVD/LD)  
(TV)  
IN  
IN  
1
SAT  
IN  
IN  
R
3
IN  
(DVR/  
VCR 2)  
L
2
ASSIGNABLE  
FR  
FL  
VIDEO /  
GAME1  
IN  
4
IN  
(CD-R)  
PB  
PR  
PB  
PR  
1
4
SUB W.  
CENTER  
ASSIGNA-  
BLE  
OUT  
1
1
2
IN  
SUR-  
DVR/  
(DVD/  
ROUND  
VCR 1  
3
2
IN  
IN  
LD)  
IN  
Y
Y
2
IN  
(CD)  
R
R
L
L
OUT  
PB  
PB  
DVR/  
SURROUND  
BACK  
VCR 2  
PR  
PR  
3
IN  
MULTI CH  
IN  
OUT  
R
L
S-VIDEO  
VIDEO  
ASSIGNABLE  
1
CONTROL  
DIGITAL  
COMPONENT VIDEO  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
The two i.LINK connectors on the rear of your receiver are  
4-pin connectors. Use a 4-pin, S400 i.LINK cable to  
connect i.LINK-equipped components.  
VSX-AX4ASi  
S400  
(AUDIO)  
Caution  
• If your i.LINK connector comes into contact with  
metallic parts of the receiver other than the i.LINK  
terminal, an electrical short may occur. Some cables  
have metal parts that may touch the unit when  
connected. Please take care to use a suitable i.LINK  
cable only.  
i.LINK-equipped component  
• The arrow on the cable connector body should be  
lined up with the arrow (to the left of the connector)  
on the receiver for correct alignment. The i.LINK  
cable should be inserted straight into the connector  
so that it snaps easily into place. If not connected  
properly the receiver will not be able to recognize any  
connected components. Note that the i.LINK cable is  
fragile and can be broken easily if too much force is  
used when connecting.  
Important  
• Please use 4-pin, S400 cables less than 3.5 meters  
long. Although longer ones are available, they may  
not work reliably.  
• There may be cases where the PQLS/rate control  
function and/or the i.LINK audio does not work prop-  
erly even when connected to i.LINK Audio-compat-  
ible equipment.  
• Do not connect/disconnect i.LINK cables or switch  
on/off any components connected using i.LINK when  
the receiver is on.  
2
Assign the i.LINK component to the input you want,  
then make any necessary output settings on the  
component.  
See The Input Setup menu on page 63 to assign the  
component to an input function on this receiver. Follow  
the operating instructions that came with the component  
to make any necessary output settings.  
• You can connect several components together using  
i.LINK. See Creating an i.LINK network below.  
51  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Other connections  
08  
Checking the i.LINK inputs  
About PQLS rate control  
If you have several i.LINK-equipped components and  
have assigned them to input functions in The Input Setup  
menu on page 63, you can confirm the settings you made  
below.  
Pioneer's PQLS (Precision Quartz Lock System)  
technology provides high-precision digital audio from  
DVD-A, SACD and audio CD sources when you use the  
i.LINK interface. A precision quartz controller in this  
receiver eliminates distortion caused by timing errors  
(jitter), giving you the best possible digital-to-analog  
conversion from the digital source.  
1
Select ‘i.LINK Check’ from the Other Setup menu  
and press ENTER.  
See The Other Setup menu on page 64 for more on  
navigating this menu screen.  
To take advantage of PQLS, you must have a player  
compatible with rate-control, and it must be switched on  
and connected to this receiver through the i.LINK  
network.  
• If no i.LINK-equipped components are connected  
i.LINK Check cannot be selected.  
7.Other Setup  
7d.i.LINK Check  
(1/2)  
a.Multi Room Setup  
(
DVD-Audio5  
DVD-Audio1  
DVD-Audio2  
DVD-Audio3  
DVD-Audio4  
DVD-Video1  
(
End  
)
)
b.SR+ Setup  
*
:
:
:
:
:
:
TV  
DVD  
Creating an i.LINK network  
c.OSD Adjustment  
d.i.LINK Check  
1
2
3
4
5
DVR  
Using i.LINK it is possible to chain up to 17 components  
together so that the digital audio and control signals  
from each component is available to other components  
in the network. With the addition of an i.LINK repeater,  
it’s possible to connect up to 63 components.  
i.LINK  
i.LINK  
----  
Next  
ꢀ:Return  
ꢀ:Return  
2
Scroll through the list to confirm your settings.  
When a number of i.LINK-equipped components are  
connected to your receiver, the i.LINK-equipped  
component you are looking for might be listed on  
additional display screens.  
i.LINK connectors come in 4-pin and 6-pin configura-  
tions. This player uses the 4-pin connection, but the two  
types can be mixed on a network.  
This receiver is compatible with i.LINK Audio (A&M  
protocol) components, such as DVD players. Note that  
when connected to i.LINK MPEG-II TS equipment (such  
as a digital satellite tuner), i.LINK DV equipment (such as  
a DVD recorder or DV camcorder), or an i.LINK-equipped  
personal computer, audio and video signals are not  
transmitted, and connecting to these devices sometimes  
causes network interruptions. Check the operating  
instructions supplied with your other i.LINK components  
for compatibility information.  
• i.LINK is displayed after unassigned device names  
(e.g. DV-868AVi [i.LINK]).  
• If a connected devices cannot output (playback) a  
source using the i.LINK connection, [- - - -] is  
displayed after the input device name (e.g. DV-  
868AVi [- - - -]). Non-compatible devices cannot be  
assigned to inputs.  
• When the cables for an assigned input device  
become loose or the power is cut to the device, an  
asterisk (*) appears before the device name (e.g.  
*DV-868AVi [CD]).  
This receiver is DTCP (Digital Transmission Content  
Protection) compliant, so you can play DVD-A, DVD-  
Video, and SACD i.LINK audio.  
3
When you're finished, press RETURN.  
When setting up an i.LINK network, it’s important that  
the components form an open ended chain (fig. 1), or a  
tree (fig. 2).  
You will return to the Other Setup menu.  
About i.LINK  
i.LINK cable  
fig. 1  
i.LINK is a trademark name for IEEE1394, a high-speed  
interface for digital audio, video and other data found on  
personal computers, digital camcorders, and other kinds  
of audio and audio/visual equipment. A single i.LINK  
connector can both send and receive data at the same  
time, so only one cable is required to connect compo-  
nents for two-way communication.  
i.LINK cable  
fig. 2  
“i.LINK” and the “i.LINK” logo are trademarks of Sony  
Corporation.  
52  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Other connections  
08  
The system will not work if the connected components  
form a loop. If a loop is detected, the message LOOP  
CONNECT shows in the display. Figs. 3 and 4 show  
connections that form a loop.  
Connecting the multichannel analog inputs  
For DVD Audio and SACD playback, your DVD player may  
have 5.1, 6.1 or 7.1 channel analog outputs (depending  
on whether your player supports surround back  
i.LINK cable  
fig. 3  
1
channels). Make sure that the player is set to output  
multichannel analog audio.  
1
Connect the front, surround, center and subwoofer  
outputs on your DVD player to the corresponding  
MULTI CH input jack on this receiver.  
• Use standard RCA/phono jack cables for the  
connections.  
i.LINK cable  
fig. 4  
2
If your DVD player also has outputs for surround  
back channels, connect these to the corresponding  
MULTI CH input jacks on this receiver.  
• Use standard RCA/phono jack cables for the  
connections.  
Another consideration when connecting i.LINK devices  
is the speed of the interface. At present there are three  
speeds; S100 (slowest), S200 and S400 (fastest). This  
receiver uses the S400 type. Although you can use  
components with different speeds together, we  
recommend connecting slower-speed components at  
the edge of the network if possible (shown by the shaded  
boxes in figs. 1 and 2). This will keep the network free of  
bottlenecks.  
• If there is a single surround back output, connect it to  
the SURROUND BACK L (Single) jack on this  
receiver.  
Selecting the multichannel analog inputs  
If you have connected a decoder or a DVD player as  
above, you must select the analog multichannel inputs  
When used within an i.LINK network, this receiver must  
be on for the i.LINK connection to be maintained. Other  
components in the network may or may not maintain the  
connection in standby (none will when the power is  
completely off)—check the operating instructions  
supplied with individual components. Note that the audio  
may be momentarily interrupted if a component in the  
i.LINK network is switched on/off, or its i.LINK  
2
for surround sound playback.  
SYSTEM OFF  
INPUT  
RECEIVER  
SOURCE  
SELECT  
connection is switched on/off.  
CD  
TV  
VIDEO  
2
This product complies with the following i.LINK interface  
specifications:  
DVD  
SAT  
VIDEO 1  
TV CONT  
1
Make sure you have set the playback source to the  
1) IEEE Std. 1394a-2000, Standard for a High Performance  
Serial Bus  
proper output setting.  
For example, you might need to set your DVD player to  
output multichannel analog audio.  
2) Audio and Music Data Transmission Protocol 2.0  
Following the standard for AM824 sequence adaptation  
layers, the product is compatible with IEC60958 bitstream,  
DVD-A and SACD.  
2
Use the INPUT SELECT button to select MULTI CH IN.  
You can also use the INPUT SELECTOR dial on the front  
panel.  
• Depending on the DVD player you’re using, the  
analog output level of the subwoofer channel may be  
too low. In this case switch the receiver into standby,  
then press ꢁ STANDBY/ON while holding down  
VIDEO SELECT on the front panel. This switches  
between SW IN +10dB (increase of 10 decibels) and  
SW IN 0dB (default) in the subwoofer channel.  
Note  
1 To listen to multichannel analog audio you’ll need to switch the input signal selector to MULTI CH INPUT (see Selecting the multichannel analog inputs  
above for more on this).  
2 • When playback from the multichannel inputs is selected, you can’t use Midnight/Loudness, Dialog Enhancement or the SIGNAL SELECT and ANA-  
LOG ATT buttons, as well as any of the listening modes (including STEREO and the surround back channel processing).  
• When playback from the multichannel inputs is selected, only the volume and channel levels can be set.  
• You can’t listen to your speaker B (Second Zone) system during playback from the multichannel inputs.  
53  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Other connections  
08  
5
Make any necessary settings required to select the  
USB interface as your computer audio output.  
You will need to make sure the correct speaker setting is  
selected with the audio software you’re using. Please  
refer to the manual that came with the software to make  
these settings.  
Using the USB interface  
VSX-AX4ASi only  
It is possible to listen to two channels of audio from your  
computer by connecting to the USB interface on the rear  
of this receiver. Depending on your model of computer  
and the software installed, you can listen to the stereo  
audio source through the speaker setup you’ve  
6
Turn up the volume control on your computer and  
this receiver.  
You may want to start with a fairly low volume on this  
receiver and turn it up as necessary after you’ve checked  
your levels.  
1
connected to this receiver.  
MULTI-ROOM  
IR  
MULTI-ROOM  
SOURCE  
MAIN ROOM(ZONE1)  
AUDIO  
PHONO  
& SOURCE  
ANTENNA  
AM LOOP  
MULTI-ROOM & SOURCE  
7
Start playback of a source on your computer.  
&
/
REC SEL  
OUT1  
ROOM3  
(ZONE3)  
FM UNBAL 75 Ω  
S400  
IN1  
IN  
MONITOR  
OUT  
(
)
AUDIO  
ROOM2(ZONE2)  
OUT  
ROOM2(ZONE2)  
R
L
OUT2  
CD  
IN  
IN2  
S400  
OUT  
USB  
AUDIO  
12  
V
TRIGGER  
HDMI  
IN1  
DVD/  
LD  
IN  
Caution  
1
2
(DC OUT 12V TOTAL 50 mA MAX)  
ROOM2  
1
2
IN  
IN  
S
I
(
OUT  
MULTI-ROOM  
SOURCE  
&
TV  
IN  
MONITOR  
OUT  
2
IN  
• Make sure you don’t switch off the computer or  
unplug the USB cable during playback.  
(ZONE2)  
IN2  
IN3  
IN4  
OUT  
(
CD-R/  
TAPE  
DVR/  
)
1
VCR  
1
OUT  
Y
IN  
1
2
(
(
2
)
DVD/LD  
IN  
IN  
1
SAT  
IN  
Y
)
TV  
IN  
R
3
IN  
L
(
DVR/  
)
2
VCR  
ASSIGNABLE  
FR  
FL  
VIDEO /  
GAME1  
IN  
4
IN  
PB  
PB  
(
)
1
CD-R  
4
SUB W.  
CENTER  
• To prevent noise being output, don’t use other  
software on your computer during playback.  
ASSIGNA-  
BLE  
PR  
PR  
OUT  
1
1
2
IN  
(
SUR-  
DVR/  
DVD/  
ROUND  
VCR 1  
3
2
IN  
)
LD  
IN  
IN  
Y
Y
2
CD  
IN  
R
R
L
L
(
)
• Pioneer is not responsible for computer system  
damage, software crashes or failures, or any other  
possible computer problems due to this  
configuration.  
OUT  
PB  
PB  
DVR/  
SURROUND  
BACK  
VCR 2  
PR  
PR  
IN  
MULTI CH  
IN  
OUT  
R
L
S-VIDEO  
VIDEO  
ASSIGNABLE  
1
3
CONTROL  
DIGITAL  
COMPONENT VIDEO  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
B-type USB  
connector  
A-type USB  
connector  
Microsoft®, Windows® XP, Windows® 2000, Windows®  
Millennium Edition, Windows® 98, and Windows NT® are  
either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft  
Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.  
Personal computer  
1
Connect your computer’s USB terminal to the USB  
terminal on the rear panel of this receiver.  
2
3
Switch on your computer and this receiver.  
If you’re connecting for the first time, wait for the  
USB driver installation to finish.  
The installation may take a minute or two to complete.  
Make sure you leave the USB cable connected until the  
dialog box indicates that the USB setup is finished. Note  
that some older operating systems may require a disc for  
2
installation.  
4
Use the INPUT SELECT button to select USB.  
You can also use the INPUT SELECTOR dial on the front  
panel.  
Note  
1 • Windows® XP, Windows® 2000, Windows® Millennium Edition and Windows® 98 Second Edition operating systems have been tested for compatibility  
with this interface, but depending on your computer setup, you may find that your system is not compatible.  
• Make sure you use a USB cable that connects from an A-type connector (from your PC) to a 4-pin B-type connector (to the receiver).  
• The USB specification is version 1.1 compatible, and the USB Audio Class specification is 1.0 compatible.  
• Any computer alert sounds will also be heard through the speakers unless you switch them off from the computer’s control panel.  
• You won’t be able to hear the audio from the USB connection through the digital outputs of this receiver.  
• Note that using hubs or extensions may cause connection problems.  
2 If your PC doesn’t recognize the receiver, try disconnecting the USB cable and connecting it again. If it is still unrecognized, restart the computer.  
54  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Other connections  
08  
• SPꢃA – Sound is output from speaker system A and  
the same signal is output from the pre-out terminals.  
Second Zone speaker B setup  
• SPꢃB – Sound is output from the two speakers  
connected to speaker system B. Multichannel  
sources will not be heard. The same signal is output  
from the surround back channel pre-out terminals.  
Caution  
• Before making or changing the connections, switch off  
the power and disconnect the power cord from the  
power outlet. Plugging in components should be the  
last connection you make with your system.  
• SPꢃAB – Sound is output from speaker system A (up  
to 5 channels, depending on the source), the two  
speakers in speaker system B, and the subwoofer.  
The sound from speaker system B will be the same as  
the sound from speaker system A (multichannel  
sources will be downmixed to 2 channels).  
• Be careful not to allow any contact between speaker  
wires from different terminals.  
• You can use speakers with a nominal impedance  
between 6 Ω to 16 Ω (please see Switching the  
speaker impedance on page 69 if you plan to use  
speakers with an impedance of less than 8 Ω).  
• SPꢃ(off) – No sound is output from the speakers. The  
same sound is output from the pre-out terminals  
(including from your subwoofer, if connected) as  
when selecting speaker system A (above).  
After selecting 2nd Zone in Surround back speaker  
setting on page 37, you can use the speakers connected  
to the (surround back) B speaker terminals on the rear  
panel to listen to stereo playback in another room. See  
Switching the speaker system below for the listening  
options with this setup.  
Bi-amping your front speakers  
Bi-amping is when you connect the high frequency driver  
and low frequency driver of your speakers to different  
amplifiers (in this case, to both front and surround back  
terminals) for better crossover performance. Your  
speakers must be bi-ampable to do this (having separate  
terminals for high and low) and the sound improvement  
will depend on the kind of speakers you’re using.  
1
Connect a pair of speakers to the surround back  
speaker terminals on the rear panel.  
Connect them the same way you connected your  
speakers in Installing your speaker system on page 17.  
Make sure to review Placing the speakers on page 18  
when placing the speakers in another room.  
1
Connect your speakers as shown below.  
This illustration below shows the connections for bi-  
amping your front left speaker. Hook up your front right  
speaker in the same way.  
2
Select ‘2nd Zone’ from the ‘Surr Back System’ menu.  
See Surround back speaker setting on page 37 to do this.  
SPEAKERS  
Switching the speaker system  
SURROUND BACK  
/
B
A
FRONT  
CENTER  
SURROUND  
R
L
R
L
R
L(Single)  
If you selected 2nd Zone in Surround back speaker setting  
on page 37, three speaker system settings are possible  
using the SPEAKERS button. If you selected Normal (SB)  
or Front Bi-Amp, the button will simply switch your main  
speaker system on or off. The options below are for the  
Front left  
speaker  
SELECTABLE  
High  
1
2nd Zone setting only.  
•
Use the SPEAKERS button on the front panel to  
Low  
select a speaker system setting.  
As mentioned above, if you have selected Normal (SB),  
the button will simply switch your main speaker system  
(A) on or off.  
Since both front and surround back speaker terminals  
output the same audio, it doesn’t matter which set (front  
or surround back) is powering which part (High or Low)  
of the speaker.  
MULTI – ROOM &  
(TUNE +)  
SPEAKERS  
BAND  
VIDEO  
SELECT  
SIGNAL  
SBch  
SOURCE/REC SEL  
STEREO  
SELECT PROCESSING  
CONTROL ON/OFF  
AV  
TUNER  
EDIT  
PARAMETER  
VIDEO/GAME  
2
INPUT  
MCACC  
SETUP MIC  
PHONES  
(ST –)  
(ST +)  
ENTER  
• Make sure that the + / – connections are properly  
ꢀ
SETUP  
RETURN  
inserted.  
DIGITAL IN S-VIDEO  
VIDEO  
L
AUDIO R  
(TUNE –)  
Press repeatedly to choose a speaker system option:  
Note  
1 • The subwoofer output depends on the settings you made in Manual speaker setup on page 44. However, if SPꢃB is selected above, no sound is heard  
from the subwoofer (the LFE channel is not downmixed).  
• Depending on the settings in Surround back speaker setting on page 37 output from the surround back pre-out terminals may change.  
• All speaker systems (except 2nd Zone connections) are switched off when headphones are connected.  
55  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Other connections  
08  
2
Select the ‘Front Bi-Amp’ setting from the ‘Surr Back  
System’ menu.  
See Surround back speaker setting on page 37 to specify  
how you’re using the surround back speaker terminals.  
Connecting additional amplifiers  
This receiver has more than enough power for any home  
use, but it’s possible to add additional amplifiers to every  
channel of your system using the pre-outs. Make the  
connections shown below to add amplifiers to power  
your speakers.  
Caution  
• Most speakers with both High and Low terminals  
have two metal plates that connect the High to the  
Low terminals. These must be removed when you are  
bi-amping the speakers or you could severely  
damage the amplifier. See your speaker manual for  
more information.  
• Before making or changing the connections, switch  
off the power and disconnect the power cord from the  
AC outlet.  
ANALOG  
INPUT  
L
R
• If your speakers have a removable crossover network,  
make sure you do not remove it for bi-amping. Doing  
so may damage your speakers.  
PRE OUT  
L
Front channel  
amplifier  
R
FRONT  
CENTER  
SUB W.  
ANALOG  
INPUT  
SUR-  
ROUND  
Center channel  
amplifier (mono)  
SUR-  
ROUND  
BACK  
Bi-wiring your speakers  
ANALOG  
INPUT  
(
)
Single  
R
L
Powered  
The reasons for bi-wiring are basically the same as bi-  
amping, but additionally, interference effects within the  
wire could be reduced, producing better sound. Again, to  
do this your speakers must be bi-wireable (that is they  
must have separate terminals for the high and low  
frequencies). When bi-wiring, make sure you’ve selected  
Normal (SB) or 2nd Zone in Surround back speaker  
setting on page 37.  
L
subwoofer  
iPod  
SPEAKERS  
A
IN  
FRONT  
R
CENTER  
ANALOG  
INPUT  
L
R
Surround channel  
amplifier  
L
L
ANALOG  
INPUT  
RS-232C  
UND  
ACK  
L
R
ULTI CH  
IN  
Surround back  
channel amplifier  
•
To bi-wire a speaker, connect two speaker cords to  
VSX-AX4ASi  
the speaker terminal on the receiver.  
• You can use the additional amplifier on the surround  
back channel pre-outs for a single speaker as well. In  
this case plug the amplifier into the left (L (Single))  
terminal only.  
• The sound from the surround back terminals will  
depend on how you have configured the Surround  
back speaker setting on page 37.  
• To hear sound only from the pre-outs, switch the  
speaker system to OFF, or simply disconnect any  
speakers that are connected directly to the receiver.  
Caution  
• Make sure you use a parallel (not series, which are  
fairly uncommon) connection when bi-wiring your  
speakers.  
• If you’re not using a subwoofer, change the front  
speaker setting (see Speaker Setting on page 45) to  
large.  
• Don't connect different speakers from the same  
terminal in this way.  
56  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Other connections  
Multi-room listening  
08  
Multi-room listening options  
The following table shows what you can listen to in each  
sub room:  
This receiver can power up to three independent systems  
in separate rooms after you have made the proper multi-  
room connections. An example multi-room setup is  
shown below, but the number of multi-room connections  
(and the way you choose to connect them) depends on  
how you want to set up your system.  
Sub room  
Input sources available  
ROOM2 (ZONE2) iPod, the built-in tuner and other analog audio  
sources (except MULTI CH IN). With video  
sources, only composite video is possible.  
ROOM3 (ZONE3) Only digital audio sources (the input source  
must already be assigned using the The Input  
Setup menu on page 63) are available.  
MULTI-ROOM  
IR  
MULTI-ROOM  
SOURCE  
MAIN ROOM(ZONE1)  
A
&
SOURCE  
ANTENNA  
&
/
REC SEL  
PHON  
OUT1  
ROOM3  
(ZONE3)  
FM UNBAL 75  
Ω
AM LOOP  
S400  
(AUDIO)  
IN1  
IN  
MONITOR  
OUT  
MULTI-ROOM & SOURCE  
ROOM2(ZONE2)  
ROOM2(ZONE2)  
OUT  
R
L
OUT2  
CD  
IN  
IN2  
S400  
OUT  
USB  
AUDIO  
IN  
12  
V
TRIGGER  
HDMI  
IN1  
Basic multi-room setup (ROOM 2)  
DVD/  
LD  
IN  
1
2
(DC OUT 12V TOTAL 50 mA MAX)  
ROOM2  
1
2
IN  
IN  
1
IN  
(SAT)  
OUT  
MULTI-ROOM  
SOURCE  
&
TV  
IN  
MONITOR  
OUT  
2
IN  
1
Connect a separate amplifier to the MULTI-ROOM &  
(ZONE2)  
IN2  
(DVR/  
CD-R/  
TAPE  
VCR 1)  
1
OUT  
Y
IN  
1
2
(DVD/LD)  
(TV)  
IN  
IN  
1
SAT  
IN  
Y
IN  
R
3
IN  
SOURCE OUT jacks and a TV monitor to the MULTI-  
ROOM & SOURCE MONITOR OUT jacks, both on the rear  
of this receiver.  
2
(DVR/  
VCR 2)  
ASSIGNABLE  
Sub room (ZONE 3)  
Sub room (ZONE 2)  
Main room  
You should have a pair of speakers attached to the sub  
room amplifier as shown in the following illustration.  
M
U
L
TI-ROOM  
IR  
MULTI-ROOM  
SOURCE  
MAIN ROOM(ZONE1)  
AUDIO  
PHONO  
&
S
O
URCE  
&
ANTENNA  
/
R
E
C
SEL  
OUT1  
FM UNBAL 75  
Ω
AM LOOP  
R
O
O
M
3
S400  
(AUDIO)  
(
ZONE3  
)
IN1  
IN  
MONITOR  
OUT  
MULTI-ROOM SOURCE  
&
ROOM2(ZONE2)  
OUT  
R
ROOM2(ZONE2)  
L
OUT2  
CD  
IN  
IN2  
S400  
OUT  
USB  
AUDIO  
IN  
HDMI  
IN1  
12  
V
TRIGGER  
DVD/  
LD  
IN  
1
2
(DC OUT 12V TOTAL 50 mA MAX)  
ROOM2  
MULTI-ROOM  
IN  
IN  
1
2
IN  
(SAT)  
1
OUT  
&
SOURCE  
TV  
IN  
PHONO  
MONITOR  
OUT  
IN  
(DVR/  
VCR 1)  
2
(ZONE2)  
IN2  
IN3  
IN4  
OUT  
CD-R/  
TAPE  
MAIN ROOM(ZONE1)  
IN  
Y
1
OUT  
Y
IN  
IN  
1
1
2
DVD/LD)  
(TV)  
SA  
T
FM UNBAL 75 Ω  
AM LOOP  
IN  
R
IN  
3
IN  
S400  
L
2
(DVR/  
VCR 2)  
ASSIGNABLE  
FR  
FL  
VIDEO  
/
IN1  
IN2  
IN  
IN  
(CD-R)  
4
PB  
PB  
PR  
GAME1  
IN  
MONITOR  
OUT  
MULTI-ROOM & SOURCE  
( )  
AUDIO  
1
4
SUB  
W.  
CENTER  
ASSIGNA-  
BLE  
PR  
2
OUT  
ROOM2(ZONE2)  
OUT  
ROOM2(ZONE2)  
R
L
IN  
1
1
2
SUR-  
DVR/  
(DVD/  
ROUND  
R
IN  
3
VCR  
1
LD)  
IN  
CD  
IN  
Y
Y
IN  
IN  
2
(CD)  
L
L
S400  
PB  
PB  
OUT  
DVR/  
OUT  
R
SURROUND  
BACK  
VCR  
2
PR  
PR  
3
IN  
MULTI CH  
IN  
12 V TRIGGER  
HDMI  
IN1  
DIGITAL IN  
OUT  
R
L
S
-
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
ASSIGNABLE  
COMPONENT VIDEO  
1
CONTROL  
DIGITAL  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
DVD/  
LD  
1
2
1
2
IN  
IN  
IN  
(
)
DC OUT 12V TOTAL 50 mA MAX  
ROOM2  
OUT  
MULTI-ROOM  
SOURCE  
MONITOR  
OUT  
&
TV  
IN  
(ZONE2)  
IN2  
CD-R/  
TAPE  
1
OUT  
Y
IN  
1
2
(
(
2
)
DVD/LD  
IN  
IN  
1
SAT  
IN  
Y
)
TV  
IN  
R
IR receiver  
ASSIGNABLE  
FR  
FL  
Sub room  
Main room  
Different sources can be playing in three rooms at the  
same time or, depending on your needs, the same source  
can also be used. The main and sub rooms have  
independent power (the main room power can be off  
while one (or both) of the sub rooms is on) and the sub  
rooms can be controlled by the remote or front panel  
controls. However, you may need to specify the volume  
settings in Multi-Room setup on page 65.  
M
U
L
TI-ROOM  
IR  
MULTI-ROOM  
SOURCE  
MAIN ROOM(ZONE1)  
AU  
&
S
O
URCE  
ANTENNA  
&
/
R
E
C
SEL  
PHONO  
OUT1  
FM UNBAL 75  
Ω
AM LOOP  
R
O
O
M
3
S400  
(AUDIO)  
(
ZONE3  
)
IN1  
IN  
MONITOR  
OUT  
MULTI-ROOM SOURCE  
&
ROOM2  
(ZONE2)  
OUT  
ROOM2(ZONE2)  
OUT2  
R
L
CD  
IN  
IN2  
S400  
OUT  
USB  
AUDIO  
IN  
HDMI  
IN1  
12  
V
TRIGGER  
DVD/  
LD  
IN  
1
2
(DC OUT 12V TOTAL 50 mA MAX)  
ROOM2  
IN  
IN  
1
2
IN  
(SAT)  
1
OUT  
MULTI-ROOM  
SOURCE  
&
TV  
IN  
MONITOR  
OUT  
IN  
2
(ZONE2)  
IN  
Y
IN2  
IN3  
IN4  
OUT  
(DVR/  
CD-R/  
TAPE  
VCR 1)  
1
OUT  
Y
(DVD/LD)  
(TV)  
IN  
IN  
1
1
SAT  
IN  
2
IN  
R
IN  
3
2
(DVR/  
VCR 2)  
ASSIGNABLE  
FR  
VIDEO  
/
IN  
(CD-R)  
4
PB  
PB  
PR  
GAME1  
IN  
1
4
SUB  
W.  
ASSIGNA-  
BLE  
OUT  
PR  
2
IN  
1
1
2
SUR-  
DVR/  
(DVD/  
ROUND  
3
VCR  
1
IN  
IN  
LD)  
Y
Y
IN  
IN  
(CD)  
2
R
PB  
PB  
OUT  
DVR/  
R
S
VCR  
2
PR  
PR  
3
IN  
OU  
R
L
S
-
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
ASSIGNABLE  
1
CONTR  
DIGITAL  
COMPONENT VIDEO  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
Making multi-room connections  
It is possible to make these connections if you have a  
separate TV and speakers for your primary (ROOM 2) sub  
room, and a separate amplifier (and speakers) for your  
secondary (ROOM 3) sub room. You will also need a  
separate amplifier if you are not using the Surround Back  
System setup (see below) for your primary sub room.  
There are two primary sub room setups possible with this  
system. Choose whichever works best for you.  
Surround Back System multi-room setup (ROOM 2)  
You must select MR&S in Surround back speaker setting  
on page 37 to use this setup. Note that the sound in the  
sub room will be temporarily interrupted when  
controlling the main room (for example, changing the  
input source or starting playback).  
1
Note  
1 You can't use sound controls (such as the tone controls or Midnight listening) or any surround modes with a separate amplifier in the sub room. You  
can, however, use the features available with your sub room amplifier.  
57  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Other connections  
08  
•
Connect a TV monitor to the MULTI-ROOM &  
Using the multi-room controls  
SOURCE MONITOR OUT jacks on the rear of this  
receiver.  
You should have a pair of speakers attached to the  
surround back speaker terminals as shown below.  
The following steps use the front panel controls to adjust  
the sub room volume and select sources. See Multi-room  
remote controls below and (VSX-AX4ASi only) Sub remote  
control unit on page 27 for more on using the remote  
control with the multi-room feature.  
MULTI – ROOM &  
(TUNE +)  
SPEAKERS  
BAND  
VIDEO  
SELECT  
SIGNAL  
SBch  
SOURCE/REC SEL  
Sub room  
Main room  
STEREO  
SELECT PROCESSING  
CONTROL ON/OFF  
AV  
TUNER  
EDIT  
PARAMETER  
VIDEO/GAME  
2
INPUT  
MCACC  
SETUP MIC  
PHONES  
(ST –)  
(ST +)  
ENTER  
ꢀ
M
U
L
TI-ROOM  
IR  
MULTI-ROOM  
SOURCE  
MAIN ROOM(ZONE1)  
AUDIO  
PHONO  
PRE OUT  
L
&
S
O
URCE  
TWO VOL AGE  
T
&
ANTENNA  
AM LOOP  
A
A
C
C
IN  
IN  
/
R
E
C
SEL  
SELECTORS  
R
FRONT  
OUT1  
SETUP  
RETURN  
FM UNBAL 75  
Ω
R
O
O
M
3
S400  
(AUDIO)  
(
ZONE3  
)
IN1  
IN  
MONITOR  
OUT  
MULTI-ROOM SOURCE  
&
ROOM2(ZONE2)  
OUT  
R
ROOM2(ZONE2)  
L
CENTER  
OUT2  
SUB  
W.  
CD  
IN  
IN2  
S400  
OUT  
USB  
AUDIO  
IN  
SUR-  
HDMI  
IN1  
12  
V
TRIGGER  
ROUND  
DVD/  
LD  
1
2
TOTAL 50 mA MAX)  
MULTI-ROOM  
IN  
IN  
1
2
IN  
DIGITAL IN S-VIDEO  
VIDEO  
L
AUDIO R  
1
(DC OUT 12V  
ROOM2  
SUR-  
(TUNE –)  
IN  
(SAT)  
ROUND  
BACK  
OUT  
&
SOURCE  
TV  
IN  
220  
V
230-  
240 V  
120-127  
MONITOR  
OUT  
IN  
(DVR/  
VCR 1)  
2
(ZONE2)  
(Single)  
IN2  
IN3  
IN4  
OUT  
CD-R/  
TAPE  
110  
V
V
R
L
IN  
Y
1
OUT  
Y
IN  
IN  
1
1
2
(DVD/LD)  
(TV)  
SA  
T
1
1
0
V
220  
V
IN  
R
IN  
3
IN  
1
20-127  
V
230-240  
V
L
2
(DVR/  
VCR 2)  
ASSIGNABLE  
FR  
FL  
iPod  
VIDEO  
/
SPEAKERS  
A
IN  
(CD-R)  
4
PB  
PB  
PR  
GAME1  
IN  
IN  
SURROUND BACK  
/
FRONT  
CENTER  
SURROUND  
B
1
4
SUB  
W.  
CENTER  
R
L
R
L
R
L
(Single)  
ASSIGNA-  
BLE  
PR  
2
OUT  
IN  
1
1
2
SUR-  
DVR/  
(DVD/  
ROUND  
R
IN  
3
VCR  
1
LD)  
IN  
Y
Y
IN  
IN  
2
(CD)  
L
L
AUDIO/VIDEO MULTI-CHANNEL RECEIVER VSX-AX4ASi  
PB  
PB  
OUT  
DVR/  
R
SURROUND  
BACK  
RS-232C  
VCR  
2
PR  
PR  
3
IN  
MULTI CH  
IN  
SELECTABLE  
OUT  
IN  
R
L
S
-
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
AABLE  
CNENT VIDEO  
1
CONTROL  
DIGITAL  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
ꢁ
STANDBY/ON  
PHASE  
CONTROL  
DIGITAL PRECISION  
PROCESSING  
S400  
PHASE  
CONTROL  
MCACC  
POSITION  
AUTO SURR/  
STREAM DIRECT  
HOME  
THX  
STANDARD  
SURROUND  
ADVANCED  
SURROUND  
12 V TRIGGER  
INPUT  
SELECTOR  
MASTER  
VOLUME  
HDMI  
IN1  
1
2
SURROUND BACK /  
B
(
L
)
Single  
L
R
(
)
DC OUT 12V TOTAL 50 mA MAX  
ROOM2  
MULTI-ROOM  
SOURCE  
&
MONITOR  
OUT  
(ZONE2)  
IN2  
1
OUT  
Y
IN  
IN  
IN  
Y
1
Press the MULTI ROOM & SOURCE ON/OFF button  
on the front panel.  
Each press selects a multi-room option:  
• ROOM 2 ON – Selects your primary (ROOM 2) sub  
Secondary multi-room setup (ROOM 3)  
Connect a separate amplifier to the OUT1 ROOM3  
room  
•
• ROOM 2&3 ON – Select both sub rooms  
(ZONE3) digital output on the rear of this receiver.  
The amplifier must have an optical digital input to make  
this connection. This will allow you to hear the digital  
• ROOM 3 ON – Selects your secondary (ROOM 3)  
sub room  
• Off – Switches the multi-room feature off  
The MULTI ROOM indicator lights when the multi-room  
1
output of a component in a second sub room.  
control has been switched on.  
MULTI-ROOM  
IR  
2
& SOURCE  
/
REC SEL  
2
Press CONTROL to select the sub room(s) you want.  
OUT1  
ROOM3  
(ZONE3)  
S400  
If you selected ROOM 2&3 ON above, you can toggle  
between ROOM 2 and ROOM 3.  
IN1  
IN2  
(
)
AUDIO  
OUT2  
USB  
S400  
3
• When the receiver is on, make sure that any  
operations for the sub room are done while ZONE  
Main room  
Sub room (ROOM 3)  
and your selected sub room(s) show in the display. If  
this is not showing, the front panel controls affect the  
main room only.  
M
U
L
TI-ROOM  
IR  
MULTI-ROOM  
SOURCE  
&
S
O
URCE  
ANTENNA  
AM LOOP  
&
/
R
E
C
SEL  
MAIN ROOM(ZONE1)  
OUT1  
FM UNBAL 75  
Ω
R
O
O
M
3
S400  
(AUDIO)  
(
ZONE3  
)
IN1  
MONITOR  
OUT  
MULTI-ROOM SOURCE  
&
ROOM2  
(ZONE2)  
OUT  
ROOM2(ZONE2)  
OUT2  
R
L
IN2  
S400  
OUT  
USB  
AUDIO  
IN  
HDMI  
IN1  
12  
V
TRIGGER  
DVD/  
LD  
1
2
(DC OUT 12V TOTAL 50 mA MAX)  
ROOM2  
IN  
IN  
1
2
3
Use the INPUT SELECTOR dial to select the source  
IN  
IN  
1
(SAT)  
MULTI-ROOM  
SOURCE  
&
TV  
IN  
MONITOR  
OUT  
IN  
(DVR/  
VCR 1)  
2
(ZONE2)  
IN  
Y
IN2  
IN3  
IN4  
OUT  
C
T
1
OUT  
Y
IN  
IN  
1
1
2
(DVD/LD)  
(TV)  
SAT  
IN  
for the room you have selected.  
IN  
3
2
(DVR/  
VCR 2)  
ASSIGNABLE  
VIDEO  
/
IN  
4
(CD-R)  
PB  
PB  
PR  
GAME1  
IN  
1
4
ASSIGNA-  
BLE  
OUT  
PR  
2
For example, ROOM 2 CD-R sends the source connected  
to the CD-R inputs to the primary (ROOM 2) sub room.  
IN  
1
1
2
DVR/  
(DVD/  
IN  
IN  
3
VCR  
1
LD)  
Y
Y
IN  
IN  
(CD)  
2
PB  
PB  
OUT  
DVR/  
VCR  
2
PR  
PR  
3
IN  
DIGITAL IN  
R
L
S
-
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
ASSIGNABLE  
1
DIGITAL  
COMPONENT VIDEO  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
• If you select TUNER, you can use the front panel  
TUNER controls to select a preset station (see Saving  
station presets on page 33 if you’re unsure how to do  
4
this).  
Note  
1 Only one sub room is possible if you connect the OUT1 ROOM3 (ZONE3) digital output to your second sub room.  
2 Note that when recording, this also selects the RECOUT input source. See Making an audio or a video recording on page 67 for more on this.  
3 If the receiver is in standby, the display is dimmed, and ZONE and your selected sub room(s) continue to show in the display.  
4 The tuner cannot be tuned to more than one station at a time. Therefore, changing the station in one room also changes the station in the other room.  
Please be careful not to change stations when recording a radio broadcast.  
58  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Other connections  
08  
4
Use the MASTER VOLUME dial to adjust the  
volume.  
Connecting an IR receiver  
This is only possible if you selected the VARIABLE  
volume control in Multi-Room setup on page 65.  
If you keep your stereo components in a closed cabinet or  
shelving unit, you can use an optional IR receiver (such  
as a Niles or Xantech unit) to control your system instead  
1
5
When you’re finished, press CONTROL again to  
3
return to the main room controls.  
of the remote sensor on the front panel of this receiver.  
You can also press the MULTI ROOM & SOURCE ON/  
OFF button on the front panel to switch off all output to  
the sub room(s).  
You may need to specify your IR receiver type in Multi-  
Room setup on page 65.  
2
1
Connect the IR receiver sensor to the MULTI-ROOM  
& SOURCE IR IN (MAIN ROOM) jack on the rear of this  
receiver.  
Multi-room remote controls  
The following table shows the possible multi-room  
remote controls:  
If you also plan to use a separate IR receiver in the sub  
room, connect this to the ROOM2(ZONE2) jack. This will  
allow you to use the sub room remote control as  
explained in (VSX-AX4ASi only) Sub remote control unit  
on page 27.  
Button  
What it does  
Selects the sub room you want to control,  
shown in the display as RCV/RM2 (ZONE/  
ROOM2) or RCV/RM3 (ZONE/ROOM3).  
SHIFT+  
RECEIVER  
Closet or shelving unit  
Switches on/off power in the currently selected  
sub room.  
ꢁ
Non-Pioneer  
IR  
component  
Use to select the input source in the currently  
selected sub room.  
INPUT  
SELECT  
IN  
Pioneer  
CONTROL  
component  
Use to select the input source directly (this may  
not work for some functions) in the currently  
selected sub room.  
Input  
source  
buttons  
IN  
OUT  
IR  
MULTI-ROOM  
SOURCE  
MAIN ROOM(ZONE1)  
&
FM UNBAL 7  
M
U
L
TI-ROOM  
IR  
MULTI-ROOM  
SOURCE  
AUDIO  
PHONO  
PRE OUT  
L
&
S
O
URCE  
ANTENNA  
AM LOOP  
&
/
R
E
C
SEL  
R
IN1  
FRONT  
MAIN ROOM(ZONE1)  
OUT1  
FM UNBAL 75  
Ω
R
O
O
M
3
S400  
(AUDI)  
MONIT  
OUT  
(
ZONE3  
)
IN1  
IN  
MONITOR  
OUT  
MULTI-ROOM SOURCE  
&
ROOM2(ZONE2)  
OUT  
ROOM2  
(ZONE2)  
OUT  
ROOM2(ZONE2)  
CENTER  
OUT2  
R
L
SUB  
W.  
CD  
IN  
IN2  
Use to set the listening volume in the currently  
selected sub room (ZONE/ROOM2 only).  
VOL +/–  
S400  
OUT  
USB  
IN2  
SUR-  
AUDIO  
IN  
12  
V
TRIGGER  
HDMI  
IN1  
ROUND  
DVD/  
LD  
IN  
1
2
(DC OUT 12V TOTAL 50 mA MAX)  
ROOM2  
1
2
IN  
IN  
SUR-  
1
IN  
(SAT)  
ROUND  
BACK  
12 V TRIGGER  
OUT  
HDMI  
N1  
MULTI-ROOM  
SOURCE  
&
TV  
IN  
MONITOR  
OUT  
2
IN  
(DVR/  
VCR 1)  
(ZONE2)  
(Single)  
IN2  
IN3  
IN4  
OUT  
CD-R/  
TAPE  
R
L
1
2
1
OUT  
Y
IN  
1
2
(DVD/LD)  
(TV)  
IN  
IN  
1
SAT  
IN  
Y
IN  
R
1
3
IN  
L
2
(DVR/  
VCR 2)  
ASSIGNABLE  
FR  
FL  
iPod  
VIDEO  
/
SPEAKERS  
A
4
PB  
PB  
PR  
IN  
(CD-R)  
1
GAME1  
IN  
IN  
FRONT  
R
L
4
SUB W.  
CENTER  
ASSIGNA-  
BLE  
OUT  
PR  
2
1
1
2
IN  
SUR-  
DVR/  
(DVD/  
ROUND  
VCR  
1
3
IN  
IN  
LD)  
Y
Y
IN  
2
IN  
(CD)  
R
R
L
L
PB  
PB  
OUT  
DVR/  
SURROUND  
BACK  
RS-232C  
VCR  
2
PR  
PR  
3
IN  
MULTI CH  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
R
L
S
-
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
ASSIGNABLE  
COMPONENT VIDEO  
1
CONTROL  
DIGITAL  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
L
SURROUND  
BACK  
MULTI CH  
IN  
OUT  
CONTROL  
IR receiver  
2
Connect the IR IN jack of another component to the  
MULTI-ROOM & SOURCE IR OUT jack on the rear of this  
receiver to link it to the IR receiver.  
Please see the manual supplied with your IR receiver for  
the type of cable necessary for the connection.  
• If you want to link a Pioneer component to the IR  
receiver, see Operating other Pioneer components  
with this unit’s sensor on page 76 to connect to the  
CONTROL jacks instead of the IR OUT jack.  
Note  
1 The volume levels of the main and sub rooms are independent.  
2 • You won’t be able to switch the main room off completely unless you’ve switched off the multi-room control first.  
• If you don’t plan to use the multi-room feature for awhile, turn off the power in both the sub and main rooms so that this receiver is in standby.  
3 • Remote operation may not be possible if direct light from a strong fluorescent lamp is shining on the IR receiver remote sensor window.  
• Note that other manufacturers may not use the IR terminology. Refer to the manual that came with your component to check for IR compatibility.  
• If using two remote controls (at the same time), the IR receiver’s remote sensor takes priority over the remote sensor on the front panel.  
59  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Other connections  
08  
Switching components on and off using  
the 12 volt trigger  
Using this receiver with a Pioneer  
plasma display  
You can connect components in your system (such as a  
screen or projector) to this receiver so that they switch on  
or off using 12 volt triggers when you select an input  
function. However, you must specify which input  
functions switch on the trigger using the The Input Setup  
menu on page 63. Note that this will only work with  
components that have a standby mode.  
If you have a Pioneer plasma display, you can use an  
1
SR+ cable to connect it to this unit and take advantage  
of various convenient features, such as automatic video  
input switching of the plasma display when the input is  
2
changed.  
12V  
TRIGGER  
CONTROL  
OUT  
MULTI-ROOM  
IR  
MULTI-ROOM  
SOURCE  
& SOURCE  
&
/
REC SEL  
MAIN ROOM(ZONE1)  
OUT1  
FM UNBAL 75 Ω  
AM  
S400  
ROOM3  
(ZONE3)  
IN1  
MONITOR  
OUT  
MULTI-R  
R
(
)
AUDIO  
ROOM2(ZONE2)  
OUT  
OUT2  
Pioneer plasma  
display  
IN2  
S400  
OUT  
USB  
AUDIO  
IN  
12 V TER  
HDMI  
IN1  
DVD/  
LD  
IN  
1
2
(DC OUT 12V TOTAL 50 mA MAX)  
ROOM2  
1
2
IN  
IN  
1
SAT  
IN  
(
)
MULTI-ROOM  
SOURCE  
&
TV  
IN  
MONITOR  
OUT  
2
IN  
IR  
MULTI-ROOM  
SOURCE  
MAIN ROOM(ZONE1)  
AUDIO  
PHONO  
PRE OUT  
L
(ZONE2)  
IN2  
ANTENNA  
AM LOOP  
&
(
DVR/  
R
FM UNBAL 75  
Ω
S400  
(AUDIO)  
IN1  
IN  
MONITOR  
OUT  
MULTI-ROOM & SOURCE  
ROOM2(ZONE2)  
ROOM2(ZONE2)  
OUT  
R
L
C
SUB W.  
CD  
IN  
IN2  
S400  
OUT  
12  
V
TRIGGER  
HDMI  
IN1  
•
Connect the 12V TRIGGER jack of this receiver to  
DVD/  
LD  
1
2
(DC OUT 12V TOTAL 50 mA MAX)  
ROOM2  
1
2
IN  
IN  
IN  
OUT  
MULTI-ROOM  
SOURCE  
&
the 12V trigger of another component.  
Use a cable with a mono mini-plug on each end for the  
connection.  
TV  
IN  
MONITOR  
OUT  
(ZONE2)  
IN2  
IN3  
IN4  
OUT  
CD-R/  
TAPE  
R
L
1
OUT  
Y
IN  
1
2
(DVD/LD)  
(TV)  
IN  
IN  
1
SAT  
IN  
Y
IN  
R
L
2
ASSIGNABLE  
FR  
FL  
iPod  
VIDEO /  
GAME1  
IN  
PB  
PR  
PB  
PR  
IN  
4
NA-  
SUB W.  
CENTER  
OUT  
2
SUR-  
• The trigger maximum power is DC OUT 12 V/50 mA  
total.  
DVR/  
ROUND  
VCR  
1
3
2
IN  
IN  
IN  
Y
Y
R
R
L
L
OUT  
DVR/  
PB  
PB  
RS-232C  
SURROUND  
BACK  
VCR  
2
After you’ve specified the input functions that will switch  
on the trigger, you’ll be able to switch the component on  
or off just by pressing the input function(s) you’ve set on  
page 63.  
PR  
PR  
3
IN  
CH  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
R
L
S-VIDEO  
VIDEO  
ASSIGNABLE  
COMPONENT VIDEO  
1
CONTROL  
DIGITAL  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
Important  
• If you connect to a Pioneer plasma display using an  
SR+ cable, you will need to point the remote control  
at the plasma display remote sensor to control the  
receiver. In this case, you won’t be able to control the  
receiver using the remote control if you switch the  
plasma display off.  
• Before you can use the extra SR+ features, you need  
to make a few settings in the receiver. See The Input  
Setup menu on page 63 and SR+ Setup for Pioneer  
plasma displays on page 65 for detailed instructions.  
Note  
1 The 3-ringed SR+ cable from Pioneer is commercially available under the part number ADE7095. Contact the Pioneer Customer Support division for  
more information on obtaining an SR+ cable (you can also use a commercially available 3-ringed mini phone plug for the connection).  
2 This receiver is compatible with all SR+ equipped Pioneer plasma displays from 2003 onward.  
60  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Other connections  
08  
•
Use a 3-ringed miniplug SR+ cable to connect the  
CONTROL IN jack of this receiver with the CONTROL  
OUT jack of your plasma display.  
Using the SR+ mode with a Pioneer  
plasma display  
When connected using an SR+ cable, a number of  
features become available to make using this receiver  
with your Pioneer plasma display even easier. These  
features include:  
• On-screen displays when making receiver settings,  
such as speaker setup, MCACC setup, and so on.  
VIDEO  
INPUT 1  
VIDEO  
INPUT 2  
Pioneer plasma  
display  
• On-screen volume display.  
• On-screen display of listening mode.  
• Automatic video input switching on the plasma  
display.  
DVD player  
Satellite receiver, etc  
• Automatic volume muting on the plasma display.  
See also SR+ Setup for Pioneer plasma displays on  
page 65 for more on setting up the receiver.  
DVD/LD  
AUDIO IN  
SAT  
AUDIO IN  
Important  
AUDIO/VIDEO MULTI-CHANNEL RECEIVER VSX-AX4ASi  
ꢁ
STANDBY/ON  
PHASE  
CONTROL  
• The additional SR+ features do not work when the  
iPod function is selected.  
PHASE  
CONTROL  
MCACC  
POSITION  
AUTO SURR/  
STREAM DIRECT  
HOME  
THX  
STANDARD  
SURROUND  
ADVANCED  
SURROUND  
INPUT  
SELECTOR  
MASTER  
VOLUME  
SLEEP  
VIDEO  
SEL  
ANALOG  
ATT  
SYSTEM OFF  
SOURCE  
INPUT  
SELECT  
RECEIVER  
+
SR  
DIMMER  
S.RETRIEVER  
This receiver  
D.ACCESS  
CLASS  
ENTER  
+
10  
DISC  
To make the most of the SR+ features, you should  
connect your source components (DVD player, etc.) in a  
slightly different way to that described in this chapter. For  
each component, connect the video output directly to the  
plasma display, and just connect the audio (analog and/  
or digital) to this receiver.  
AV PARAMETER  
CH LEVEL  
MENU  
TOP MENU ì  
TUNE  
CD  
TV  
VIDEO  
2
DVD  
SAT  
VIDEO 1  
TV CONT  
ST  
ST  
T.EDIT  
ì
ENTER  
RETURN  
SETUP  
DVR2  
CD-R  
i Pod  
MULTI IN  
TUNER  
ROOM2/3  
RECEIVER  
ꢀ
DVR1  
TUNE  
GUIDEPTY SEARCH  
BAND  
1
Make sure that the plasma display and this receiver  
are switched on and that they are connected with the  
SR+ cable.  
See Using this receiver with a Pioneer plasma display  
above for more on connecting these components.  
• Make sure you have also selected the display input to  
which you’ve connected the receiver in The Input  
Setup menu on page 63.  
2
To switch SR+ mode on/off, press RECEIVER, then  
the SR+ button.  
The front panel display shows SR+ ON or SR+ OFF.  
• The automatic volume muting feature is enabled  
separately; see SR+ Setup for Pioneer plasma displays  
on page 65.  
61  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Other connections  
08  
Advanced MCACC output using your PC  
Before continuing, make sure you have completed steps  
1–3 in Professional Acoustic Calibration EQ on page 40.  
Note that transmission data is erased when the receiver  
is turned off.  
Connecting a PC for Advanced MCACC  
output  
If you use the Professional Acoustic Calibration EQ (see  
page 40) to measure the reverb characteristics of your  
listening room, you can check the results graphically  
using a computer connected to this receiver. Use a  
commercially-available RS-232C cable to connect the RS-  
232C jack on your computer to the 9-pin RS-232C jack on  
the back panel of this receiver (the cable must be cross  
type, female–female).  
1
Select ‘Reverb Output PC’ and press ENTER.  
When the receiver is ready for transmission, Start the  
MCACC application on your PC shows on the OSD.  
3e.EQ Professional  
3e3.Reverb Output PC  
MCACC:M1. MEMORY  
1.Reverb Measurement  
2.Reverb View  
1
3.Reverb Output PC  
4.Advanced EQ Setup  
Start the MCACC  
application on your PC  
The software to output the results is available by  
contacting the Pioneer Authorized Distributor for your  
area (as listed on the back page of this manual) as well  
as the instructions necessary for using it.  
ENTER:Next  
ꢀ:Return  
ꢀ:Cancel  
2
Start the MCACC application on your computer.  
Please make sure your system meets the following  
requirements:  
Follow the instructions provided with the application. It  
will take about ten seconds for the transmission to  
complete, then you will be able to analyze the output on  
your computer. Since the data will be cleared from the  
receiver when you restart reverb measurement or turn off  
the receiver, you might want to save the information on  
your PC after measurement.  
®
®
• Operating system must be Windows XP, Windows  
®
®
2000, Windows Millennium Edition, Windows 98  
Second Edition, or Windows NT 4.0 (Service pack 6).  
®
• CPU must be at least Pentium 3 / 300 MHz or AMD  
K6 / 300 MHz (or equivalent) with at least 128 MB of  
memory, and your monitor must be able to display a  
minimum resolution of 800x600.  
3
When you’re finished, press RETURN.  
You’ll be taken to the Advanced EQ Setup. Depending on  
the results, you may want to continue with the Advanced  
EQ setup (see Using Professional Acoustic Calibration EQ  
on page 42 for more on this). You can also simply press  
RETURN again to exit the Professional Acoustic  
Calibration EQ setup.  
• An RS-232C port connector is necessary for  
graphical output. Refer to the operating instructions  
and/or the PC manufacturer for more information on  
making the proper port settings.  
• System must have internet access.  
•
Connect your computer to the RS-232C jack on  
the rear panel of the receiver.  
Make sure that the receiver and all connected  
components are switched off and disconnected from the  
1
power outlet when you do this.  
Use a commercially-available cable to connect the RS-  
232C jack on your computer to the 9-pin RS-232C jack on  
this receiver. See the documentation provided with the  
Advanced MCACC application for more information.  
RS-232C  
Personal computer  
Note  
1 Make sure that you do this before continuing to the Reverb Measurement option in Using Professional Acoustic Calibration EQ on page 42 (measure-  
ment data is cleared if you switch off the power).  
62  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Other Settings  
09  
Chapter 9:  
Other Settings  
4
Select the input function that you want to set up.  
The default names correspond with the names next to the  
terminals on the rear panel (such as DVD/LD or VIDEO  
1/GAME 1) which, in turn, correspond with the names  
on the remote control.  
The Input Setup menu  
You only need to make settings in the Input Setup menu  
if you didn’t hook up your digital equipment according to  
the default settings (see Input function default and  
possible settings below). In this case, you need to tell the  
receiver what equipment is hooked up to which terminal  
so the buttons on the remote correspond to the  
components you’ve connected.  
6.Input Setup  
Input  
(1/2)  
6.Input Setup  
(
(2/2)  
DVD  
Back)  
TV Game  
Input Name Default  
M.ROOM  
ROOM  
Input-1  
Digital In  
[
[
[
[
COAX-1  
Input-2  
Comp-2  
Input-1  
]
]
]
]
HDMI Input  
Component In  
S-Video In  
i.LINK In  
12V Trigger1  
12V Trigger2  
PDP In (SR+)  
[
[
[
]
]
]
2
[
DV-S969A  
Next  
]
(
)
ꢀ:Finish  
ENTER  
:
Next  
ꢀ:Finish  
SYSTEM OFF  
INPUT  
RECEIVER  
SOURCE  
D.ACCESS  
CLASS  
ENTER  
SELECT  
+
10  
DISC  
5
Select the input(s) to which you’ve connected your  
AV PARAMETER  
CH LEVEL  
MENU  
TOP MENU ì  
TUNE  
component.  
ST  
ST  
T.EDIT  
ì
ENTER  
For example, if your DVD player only has an optical  
output, you will need to change the DVD/LD input  
function’s Digital In setting from COAX 1 (default) to the  
optical input you’ve connected it to. The numbering  
(OPT1–4) corresponds with the numbers beside the  
inputs on the back of the receiver.  
RETURN  
SETUP  
ꢀ
TUNE  
GUIDEPTY SEARCH  
BAND  
TV CONTROL  
CD  
TV  
VIDEO  
2
DVD  
SAT  
VIDEO 1  
TV CONT  
INPUT  
TV VOL  
TV CH  
VOL  
SELECT  
DVR2  
CD-R  
i Pod  
MULTI IN  
TUNER  
ROOM2/3  
RECEIVER  
DVR1  
1
Switch on the receiver and your TV.  
Use the ꢁ RECEIVER button to switch on.  
• If you change the setting to an input that has been  
previously assigned to another function (for example,  
SAT) then the setting for that function will  
automatically be switched off.  
2
Press RECEIVER on the remote control, then press  
the SETUP button.  
An on-screen display (OSD) appears on your TV. Use the  
ꢀ/ꢁ/ꢂ/ꢃ buttons and ENTER to navigate through the  
screens and select menu items. Press RETURN to  
confirm and exit the current menu.  
• If you used component video cords to connect your  
component you must tell the receiver which input  
you connected it to, or else you may see the S-video  
or composite video input instead of the component  
1
3
Select ‘Input Setup’ from the System Setup menu.  
video signal.  
• If you have more than one iLINK component  
connected, you can assign each one to a different  
input function in the same way (to check your  
settings after doing so, see Checking the i.LINK  
System Setup  
1.Auto MCACC  
6.Input Setup  
Input  
(1/2)  
DVD  
2.Surr Back System  
3.Manual MCACC  
4.Data Management  
5.Manual SP Setup  
6.Input Setup  
Digital In  
[
[
[
[
COAX-1  
Input-2  
Comp-2  
Input-1  
]
]
]
]
HDMI Input  
Component In  
S-Video In  
i.LINK In  
7.Other Setup  
2
[
DV-S969A  
Next  
]
inputs on page 52).  
(
)
ꢀ:Finish  
ꢀ
:
Exit  
6
When you’re finished, select ‘Next’ to continue to  
the next screen.  
The second screen of the Input setup has three optional  
settings:  
• Input name – You can choose to rename the input  
function for easier identification. Select Rename to  
do so, or Default to return to the system default.  
Note  
1 For high-definition video (using component video connections), or when digital video conversion is switched off (in Setting the AV options on page 66),  
you must connect your TV to this receiver using the same type of video cable as you used to connect your video component.  
2 • If you assign i.LINK-equipped components to an input (for example DVD/LD), you will be able to select both audio and video signals from i.LINK-  
equipped components using the corresponding input source button (or the INPUT SELECT button / INPUT SELECTOR dial). Assigning i.LINK sources also  
allows you to keeps the sound settings you’ve made for other input functions.  
• An i.LINK-equipped video component should be assigned to the input function to which you have connected the video signal from the component.  
• If you assign an i.LINK input to a certain function (for example DVD/LD) then any digital inputs previously assigned to that function will automatically  
be set to i.LINK (not assigned).  
63  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Other Settings  
09  
• 12V Trigger 1 / 2 – After connecting a component to  
one of the 12 volt triggers (see Switching components  
on and off using the 12 volt trigger on page 60), select  
M. ROOM, ROOM2, ROOM3 or OFF for the  
corresponding trigger setting to switch it on  
automatically along with the (main or sub) room  
specified.  
The Other Setup menu  
The Other Setup menu is where you can make  
customized settings to reflect how you are using the  
receiver.  
SYSTEM OFF  
INPUT  
RECEIVER  
SOURCE  
D.ACCESS  
CLASS  
ENTER  
SELECT  
+
10  
DISC  
• PDP In (SR+) – To control certain functions on this  
AV PARAMETER  
TOP MENU ì  
CH LEVEL  
MENU  
receiver from a plasma display, select the display  
TUNE  
1
input to which you’ve connected the receiver.  
ST  
ST  
T.EDIT  
ì
RETURN  
ENTER  
SETUP  
ꢀ
TUNE  
7
When you're finished, press RETURN.  
GUIDEPTY SEARCH  
BAND  
TV CONTROL  
CD  
TV  
VIDEO  
2
You will return to the System Setup menu.  
DVD  
SAT  
VIDEO 1  
TV CONT  
INPUT  
SELECT  
TV VOL  
TV CH  
VOL  
DVR2  
CD-R  
i Pod  
MULTI IN  
TUNER  
ROOM2/3  
RECEIVER  
DVR1  
Input function default and possible settings  
The terminals on the rear of the receiver generally  
correspond to the name of one of the input source  
functions. If you have connected components to this  
receiver differently from (or in addition to) the defaults  
below, see The Input Setup menu above to tell the  
receiver how you’ve connected up. The dots (ì) indicate  
1
Switch on the receiver and your TV.  
Use the ꢁ RECEIVER button to switch on.  
2
Press RECEIVER on the remote control, then press  
the SETUP button.  
An on-screen display (OSD) appears on your TV. Use the  
ꢀ/ꢁ/ꢂ/ꢃ buttons and ENTER to navigate through the  
screens and select menu items. Press RETURN to  
confirm and exit the current menu.  
possible assignments.  
Input Terminals  
Digital i.LINK HDMI  
Input  
source  
Component S-Video  
3
Select ‘Other Setup’ then press ENTER.  
DVD/LD  
TV  
COAX 1  
ì
ì
ì
ì
ì
ì
ì
ì
ì
ì
ì
ì
ì
ì
IN 1  
IN 2  
System Setup  
1.Auto MCACC  
7.Other Setup  
a.Multi Room Setup  
b.SR+ Setup  
c.OSD Adjustment  
d.i.LINK Check  
ì
ì
2.Surr Back System  
3.Manual MCACC  
4.Data Management  
5.Manual SP Setup  
6.Input Setup  
SAT  
OPT 1  
OPT 2  
OPT 3  
ì
ì
7.Other Setup  
DVR/VCR1  
DVR/VCR2  
VIDEO/GAME1  
VIDEO/GAME2  
HDMI 1  
ì
(Fixed)  
(Fixed)  
ì
ꢀ
:
Exit  
ꢀ:Return  
ì
4
Select the setting you want to adjust.  
If you are doing this for the first time, you may want to  
adjust these settings in order:  
ì
(Fixed)  
ì
ì
(Fixed)  
ì
(HDMI-1  
)
• Multi Room Setup – Specify your volume setting for  
a multi-room setup (see Multi-Room setup below).  
HDMI 2  
HDMI 3  
ì
ì
ì
ì
(HDMI-2)  
• SR+ Setup – Specify how you want to control your  
Pioneer plasma display (see SR+ Setup for Pioneer  
plasma displays below).  
(HDMI-3  
)
HDMI 4  
(VSX-AX4ASi )  
ì
ì
(
HDMI-4)  
• OSD Adjustment – Adjust the position of the on-  
screen display on your TV (see OSD Adjustment  
below).  
USB  
CD  
COAX 2  
OPT 4  
ì
ì
• i.LINK Check (VSX-AX4ASi only) – Check which i.LINK-  
equipped components you have connected, and  
which input function they are assigned to (Checking  
the i.LINK inputs on page 52).  
CD-R/TAPE/MD  
TUNER  
PHONO  
MULTI CH IN  
iPod  
5
Make the adjustments necessary for each setting,  
pressing RETURN to confirm after each screen.  
i.LINK  
Note  
1 You will have to make an SR+ cable connection from a CONTROL OUT jack on the display to the CONTROL IN jack on this receiver (opposite from the  
setup in Using this receiver with a Pioneer plasma display on page 60). Note that to control this receiver using the remote, you will have to point it at the  
plasma display’s remote sensor after making this connection.  
64  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Other Settings  
09  
• ON – When the receiver is switched to one of the  
inputs that use the plasma display (DVD/LD, for  
example), the volume on the plasma display is muted  
so only sound from the receiver is heard.  
Multi-Room setup  
• Default setting: Variable  
If you’ve made multi-room connections (see Multi-room  
listening on page 57) you may need to specify your  
volume setting.  
3
Assign any input source connected to the plasma  
display to the corresponding input number.  
This matches the receiver’s input source with a  
numbered video input on the plasma display. For  
example, assign DVD/LD to input-2 if you have  
connected the your DVD video output to video input 2 on  
the plasma display.  
1
Select ‘Multi-Room’ from the System Setup  
menu.  
7.Other Setup  
7a.Multi Room Setup  
Volume Level  
a.Multi Room Setup  
b.SR+ Setup  
Variable  
c.OSD Adjustment  
d.i.LINK Check  
Be careful of loud  
volume when "FIXED"  
is selected.  
• The Monitor Out Connect should be set to the input  
that you’ve used to connect this receiver to your  
plasma display.  
ꢀ:Return  
ꢀ:Finish  
1
7b.SR+ Setup  
2
Select the volume level setting.  
PDP Volume Control  
[
OFF  
]
• Variable – Use this setting if you’ve connected a  
power amplifier in the sub room (this receiver is  
simply being used as a pre-amp) and you will be  
using this receiver’s controls to adjust the volume.  
Monitor Out Connect  
OFF  
ꢀ:Finish  
• Fixed – Use this setting if you’ve connected a fully  
integrated amplifier (such as another Pioneer VSX  
receiver) in the sub room and want to use that  
receiver’s volume controls. (This setting is not  
available if the surround back system setting is set to  
Multi Room & Source.)  
4
When you're finished, press RETURN.  
You will return to the Other Setup menu.  
OSD Adjustment  
Use this feature to adjust your TV display if it seems  
difficult to see all the instructions on the screen.  
With the Fixed setting, the source is sent from this  
receiver at maximum volume, so make sure the volume is  
quite low in the sub room at first and then experiment to  
find the correct level.  
1
Select ‘OSD Adjustment’ from the Other Setup  
menu.  
7.Other Setup  
3
When you're finished, press RETURN.  
a.Multi Room Setup  
b.SR+ Setup  
You will return to the Other Setup menu.  
c.OSD Adjustment  
d.i.LINK Check  
X=0  
,
Y=0  
[
Finish  
]
SR+ Setup for Pioneer plasma displays  
Make the following settings if you have connected a  
Pioneer plasma display to this receiver using an SR+  
cable. Note that the number of function settings available  
will depend on the plasma display you’ve connected.  
ꢀ:Cancel  
ꢀ:Return  
2
Use ꢀ/ꢁ/ꢂ/ꢃ to move the display field around  
until you get one that you feel best suits your TV.  
3
When you're finished, press ENTER  
.
See also Using this receiver with a Pioneer plasma display  
on page 60 and Using the SR+ mode with a Pioneer  
plasma display on page 61.  
You will return to the Other Setup menu.  
1
Select ‘SR+ Setup’ from the Other Setup menu.  
7.Other Setup  
7b.SR+ Setup  
a.Multi Room Setup  
b.SR+ Setup  
PDP Volume Control  
OFF  
c.OSD Adjustment  
d.i.LINK Check  
Monitor Out Connect  
OFF  
[
]
ꢀ:Return  
ꢀ:Finish  
2
Select the ‘PDP Volume Control’ setting you want.  
• OFF – The receiver does not control the volume of the  
plasma display.  
Note  
1 If you selected MR&S in the Surround back speaker setting on page 37, you won’t be able to change the volume level.  
65  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using other functions  
10  
Chapter 10  
Using other functions  
Setting  
What it does  
Option(s)  
Setting the AV options  
Center  
Adjusts the center image to create a  
wider stereo effect with vocals.  
Adjust the effect from 0 (all center  
channel sent to front right and left  
speakers) to 10 (center channel sent  
to the center speaker only).  
0 to 10  
Default: 3  
Imageb  
There are a number of additional sound and picture  
settings you can make using the AV Parameter menu.  
The defaults, if not stated, are listed in bold.  
(Applicable  
only when  
usingacenter  
speaker)  
Important  
Effect  
Sets the effect level for the currently  
selected Advanced Surround mode  
(each mode can be set separately).  
10 to 90  
• Note that if a setting doesn’t appear in the AV  
Parameter menu, it is unavailable due to the current  
source, settings and status of the receiver.  
High Bit /  
High  
Sampling  
Creates a wider dynamic range with  
digital sources like CDs or DVDs.  
OFF  
ON  
1
2
Press AV PARAMETER  
.
Use ꢀ/ꢁ to select the setting you want to adjust.  
Digital  
Noise  
Reduction  
(DNR)  
May improve the quality of sound in a  
noisy source (for example, cassette  
or video tape with lots of background  
noise) when switched on.  
OFF  
ON  
Depending on the current status / mode of the receiver,  
certain options may not be able to be selected. Check the  
table below for notes on this.  
3
Use ꢂ/ꢃ to set it as necessary.  
Dual Mono Specifies how dual mono encoded  
Dolby Digital and DTS soundtracks  
should be played. Dual mono is not  
widely used, but is sometimes  
CH1 – Channel  
1 is heard only  
See the table below for the options available for each  
setting.  
CH2 – Channel  
2 is heard only  
4
Press RETURN to confirm and exit the menu.  
necessary when two languages need  
to be sent to separate channels.  
CH1 CH2 –  
Both channels  
heard from  
Setting  
What it does  
Option(s)  
Midnight  
Allows you to hear effective surround MID/LDN OFF  
sound of movies at low volumes.  
front speakers  
MIDNIGHT ON  
Dynamic  
Range  
Control  
Specifies the amount of dynamic  
range adjustment to Dolby Digital  
and DTS movie soundtracks (you  
may want to use this when listening  
to surround sound at low volumes).  
OFF  
MAX  
MID  
Used to get good bass and treble  
from music sources at low volumes.  
Loudness  
LOUDNESS ON  
(DRC)  
Tone  
control  
Applies the treble and bass tone  
controls to a source, or bypasses  
them completely.  
BYPASS  
ON  
Dialog  
Enhance-  
menta  
Localizes dialog in the center  
channel to make it stand out from  
other background sounds in a TV or  
movie soundtrack.  
OFF  
Bass  
Adjusts the amount of bass.  
–6 to +6 (dB)  
default: 0 (dB)  
ON  
Treble  
Center  
Adjusts the amount of treble.  
–6 to +6 (dB)  
default: 0 (dB)  
SACD Gainc  
Brings out detail in SACDs by  
maximizing the dynamic range  
(during digital processing).  
0 to 6 (dB)  
default: 0 (dB)  
Provides a better blend of the front  
speakers by spreading the center  
channel between the front right and  
left speakers, making it sound wider  
(higher settings) or narrower (lower  
settings).  
0 to 7  
default: 3  
Widtha  
(Applicable  
only when  
usingacenter  
speaker)  
Sound  
Delay  
Some monitors have a slight delay  
when showing video, so the  
0.0 to 6.0  
(frames)  
1 second = 30  
frames (NTSC)/  
25 frames (PAL)  
soundtrack will be slightly out of sync  
with the picture. By adding a bit of  
delay, you can adjust the sound to  
match the presentation of the video.  
Dimensionb  
Adjusts the depth of the surround  
sound balance from front to back,  
making the sound more distant  
(minus settings), or more forward  
(positive settings).  
–3 to +3  
default: 0  
HDMId  
Specifies the routing of the HDMI  
audio signal out of this receiver (amp)  
or through to a TV or plasma display.  
AMP  
THROUGH  
Panoramab  
Extends the front stereo image to  
include the surround speakers for a  
‘wraparound’ effect.  
OFF  
Digital  
Video  
Conversion  
Converts video signals for output  
from the MONITOR OUT jacks for all  
video types.  
ON  
ON  
OFF  
66  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using other functions  
10  
Setting  
What it does  
Option(s)  
Making an audio or a video recording  
Brightness Adjusts the overall brightness.  
–10 to +10  
default: 0  
You can make an audio or a video recording from the  
built-in tuner, or from an audio or video source  
Adjusts the contrast between light  
and dark.  
–10 to +10  
default: 0  
Contrast  
Hue  
1
connected to the receiver (such as a CD player or TV).  
Keep in mind you can't make a digital recording from an  
analog source or vice-versa, so make sure the  
components you are recording to/from are hooked up in  
the same way (see Connecting your equipment on  
page 10 for more on connections).  
Adjusts the red/green balance.  
–10 to +10  
default: 0  
Resolutione  
Specifies the output resolution of the  
video signal (select this according to  
the resolution of your monitor and  
the disc you wish to watch).  
PURE  
480p (NTSC)  
or 576p (PAL)  
Since the video converter is not available when making  
recordings (from the video OUT jacks) make sure to use  
the same type of video cable for connecting your recorder  
as you used to connect your video source (the one you  
want to record) to this receiver. For example, you must  
connect your recorder using S-video if your source has  
also been connected using S-video.  
720p  
1080i  
Aspect  
Specifies the aspect ratio of an  
analog video signal (if the image  
doesn’t match your monitor type,  
cropping occurs as indicated in  
parentheses at left).  
THROUGH  
(none)  
4:3 (left/right)  
For more information about video connections, see  
Connecting a DVD/HDD recorder, VCR and other video  
sources on page 13.  
ZOOM  
(top/bottom)  
a.Only when listening to 2-channel sources in Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music /  
Dolby Pro Logic II Music mode.  
b.Only when listening to 2-channel sources in Neo:6 Music mode.  
c.You shouldn't have any problems using this with most SACD discs, but  
if the sound distorts, it is best to switch the gain setting back to 0 dB  
(VSX-AX2AS only – The feature is intended for use with future improvements  
with the HDMI interface).  
SYSTEM OFF  
INPUT  
RECEIVER  
SOURCE  
SELECT  
d.When THROUGH is selected, the Resolution is automatically set to  
PURE (regardless of the setting).  
CD  
TV  
VIDEO  
2
DVD  
SAT  
VIDEO 1  
TV CONT  
e.There are cases where (depending on the resolution of the video signal  
and your monitor) you may not be able to see a picture after selecting a  
resolution setting. If this happens, select a different resolution setting.  
Also, depending on the source component or the monitor you are using  
the output resolution may be different from the setting you’ve made here.  
Note that analog input signals are unaffected when using the 720p and  
1080i resolution settings.  
DVR2  
CD-R  
i Pod  
MULTI IN  
TUNER  
ROOM2/3  
RECEIVER  
DVR1  
1
Select the source you want to record.  
Use the input source buttons (or INPUT SELECT).  
• If necessary, press SIGNAL SELECT to select the  
input signal corresponding to the source component  
(see Choosing the input signal on page 31 for more  
on this).  
2
Prepare the source you want to record.  
Tune to the radio station, load the CD, video, DVD etc.  
3
Prepare the recorder.  
Insert a blank tape, MD, video etc. into the recording  
device and set the recording levels.  
Refer to the instructions that came with the recorder if  
you are unsure how to do this. Most video recorders set  
the audio recording level automatically—check the  
component's instruction manual if you're unsure.  
4
Start recording, then start playback of the source  
component.  
Note  
1 • The receiver's volume, AV parameters (the tone controls, for example), and surround effects have no effect on the recorded signal.  
• Some digital sources are copy-protected, and can only be recorded in analog.  
• Some video sources are copy-protected. These cannot be recorded.  
67  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using other functions  
10  
Playing a different source when recording  
Using this receiver, it’s possible to listen to a different  
source than the one you’re recording.  
Reducing the level of an analog signal  
The input attenuator lowers the input level of an analog  
signal when it’s too strong. You can use this if you find  
the that the OVER indicator is lights often, or you can  
MULTI – ROOM &  
(TUNE +)  
SPEAKERS  
BAND  
VIDEO  
SELECT  
SIGNAL  
SBch  
SOURCE/REC SEL  
STEREO  
SELECT PROCESSING  
CONTROL ON/OFF  
AV  
TUNER  
EDIT  
PARAMETER  
VIDEO/GAME  
2
INPUT  
3
MCACC  
SETUP MIC  
PHONES  
(ST –)  
(ST +)  
ENTER  
hear distortion in the sound.  
ꢀ
SETUP  
RETURN  
DIGITAL IN S-VIDEO  
VIDEO  
L
AUDIO R  
SLEEP  
VIDEO  
SEL  
ANALOG  
ATT  
(TUNE –)  
+
SR  
DIMMER  
S.RETRIEVER  
1
During recording, press the REC SELECT CONTROL  
button on the front panel until RECOUT shows in the  
D.ACCESS  
CLASS  
ENTER  
+
10  
DISC  
1
display.  
•
Press ANALOG ATT to switch the input attenuator  
2
While RECOUT shows in the display, use the  
on or off.  
INPUT SELECTOR dial to select the source you want  
to record.  
The default, RECOUT SOURCE, records the source you’re  
currently listening to (as in Making an audio or a video  
recording above).  
Watching video and audio sources  
independently  
• Note that the setting you make here is stored in  
memory, even if you switch off the receiver, so if you  
want to record a different input source later, you  
must do so with REC SELECT, or by selecting  
RECOUT SOURCE.  
You can listen to a sound source and select a different  
video source on your TV.  
SLEEP  
VIDEO  
SEL  
ANALOG  
ATT  
+
SR  
DIMMER  
S.RETRIEVER  
3
After RECOUT disappears from the display, select  
D.ACCESS  
CLASS  
ENTER  
+
10  
the input source you want to listen to.  
DISC  
This will be heard from the main system without affecting  
2
•
While listening to a source, press VIDEO SEL (VIDEO  
your recording.  
SELECT) to select the video source you want to watch.  
Press repeatedly to cycle through the possible video  
sources. You can select DVD, TV, SAT, DVR1, DVR2,  
Tip  
4
• If you have a digital recorder connected to the  
DIGITAL OUT1 (ROOM3) digital output and ROOM  
3 is switched on (see Using the multi-room controls  
on page 58), you can also select a different input  
source for this output while ROOM 3 shows in the  
display.  
VIDEO1, VIDEO2 or OFF (no video signal).  
Note  
1 If RECOUT does not appear in the display, you may have to switch ROOM 2 off by pressing MULTI ROOM & SOURCE ON/OFF and selecting either  
ROOM 3 or off (the MULTI-ROOM indicator disappears). See Using the multi-room controls on page 58 for more on this.  
2 • Note that switching the ROOM 2 input source (as explained in Multi-room listening on page 57) also changes the RECOUT input source.  
• If RECOUT SOURCE is selected, changing the input source likewise changes the input source used for your recording.  
3 The attenuator isn’t available with digital sources, or when using the Stream Direct modes.  
4 • Note that this feature will not work with video sources assigned to either of the HDMI video inputs.  
• This feature is not available when watching photos or video content from a connected iPod (see page 49).  
68  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using other functions  
Using the sleep timer  
10  
Checking your system settings  
The sleep timer switches the receiver into standby after a  
specified amount of time so you can fall asleep without  
worrying about the receiver being left on all night. Use  
the remote control to set the sleep timer.  
Use the status display screen to check your current  
settings for features such as surround back channel  
processing and your current MCACC preset.  
AUDIO SUBTITLE HDD  
DVD  
CH  
DISP  
STATUS SIGNAL SEL  
CH  
PHOTO  
SLEEP  
VIDEO  
SEL  
ANALOG  
ATT  
SBch  
STEREO  
+
SR  
DIMMER  
S.RETRIEVER  
MULTI OPE  
SHIFT  
THX  
STANDARD ADV. SURR  
PHASE  
MCACC  
S.DIRECT  
D.ACCESS  
CLASS  
ENTER  
+
10  
DISC  
1
Press STATUS to check the system settings.  
•
Press SLEEP repeatedly to set the sleep time.  
These appear on both the OSD and the front panel  
display.  
2
30 min  
Off  
60 min  
90 min  
STATUS  
96kHz STEREO  
Signal Select  
:
AUTO  
SBch Processin : OFF  
• You can check the remaining sleep time at any time  
Retriever  
:
ON  
Video Select  
: OFF  
by pressing SLEEP once. Pressing repeatedly will  
MCACC Position : M1  
Room2/REC SEL : SOURCE  
1
Room3  
: SOURCE  
cycle through the sleep options again.  
The front panel display shows each of the following  
settings for two seconds each:  
Dimming the display  
You can choose between four brightness levels for the  
front panel display. Note that when selecting sources,  
the display automatically brightens for a few seconds.  
Input source  
Signal Select  
Sound Retriever  
MCACC Position  
Room3  
Listening mode  
Surround Back Processing  
Video Select  
SLEEP  
VIDEO  
SEL  
ANALOG  
ATT  
+
SR  
DIMMER  
S.RETRIEVER  
Room2 / REC SEL  
D.ACCESS  
CLASS  
ENTER  
+
10  
DISC  
2
When you’re finished, press STATUS again to  
•
Press DIMMER repeatedly to change the brightness  
switch off the display.  
of the front panel display.  
Switching the speaker impedance  
We recommend using speakers of 8 Ω with this system,  
but it is possible to switch the impedance setting if you  
plan to use speakers with a 6 Ω impedance rating. Use  
the front panel controls to do this.  
•
With the receiver in standby, press ꢁ STANDBY/  
ON while holding down the SPEAKERS button.  
Each time you do this, you switch between the  
impedance settings:  
• SP 6 OHM – Use this setting if your speakers are  
rated at 6 Ω.  
• SP 8 OHM – Use this setting if your speakers are  
rated at 8 Ω or more.  
Note  
1 You can also switch off the sleep timer simply by switching off the receiver.  
2 If the Pure Direct mode is switched on, some settings above will show OFF, even though they are on.  
69  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using other functions  
Resetting the system  
10  
Setting  
Default  
M1: MEMORY 1  
ON  
MCACC Position Memory  
Use this procedure to reset all the receiver’s settings to  
the factory default. Use the front panel controls to do this.  
Surround back channel  
Processing  
1
Switch the receiver into standby.  
Phase Control  
Sound Delay  
Sound Retriever  
Dual Mono  
DRC  
On  
0 frame  
Off  
2
While holding down the front panel AV  
PARAMETER button, press and hold  
for about three seconds.  
The display shows RESET?.  
ꢁ
STANDBY/ON  
CH1  
OFF  
0 dB  
OFF  
90  
3
Press the front panel ENTER button.  
The display shows RESET OK?.  
SACD Gain  
Digital Safety  
4
Press SETUP to confirm.  
OK appears in the display to indicate that the receiver  
has been reset to the factory default settings.  
Effect Level  
7 ch Stereo  
Other modes  
• Note that all settings will be saved, even if the  
receiver is unplugged.  
50  
2PL II Music Options Center Width  
3
Default system settings  
Dimension  
Panorama  
0
Setting  
Default  
OFF  
3
HDMI Audio  
Amp  
Neo:6 Options  
All Inputs  
Center Image  
Digital Video Conversion  
Speakers  
On  
A
Listening Mode (2 ch) AUTO SURROUND  
Listening Mode (x ch) AUTO SURROUND  
Surround Back System  
Speaker System  
Normal (SBch)  
SMALL  
SMALL  
SMALL  
SMALLx2  
YES  
Listening Mode (HP)  
STEREO  
Front  
Center  
Surr.  
SB  
See also Setting the AV options on page 66 for other default DSP  
settings.  
MCACC  
Channel level (M1–M6)  
0 dB  
3.0 m  
ON  
Speaker Distance (M1–M6)  
SW  
Standing Wave  
(M1–M6)  
Standing Wave On/  
Off  
Crossover  
80 Hz  
Bass Peak Level  
X-Curve  
OFF  
ATT  
0 dB  
0.0  
OFF  
SWch Wide Trim  
All channels/bands  
THX Audio Setting  
Inputs  
0.0–0.3 m  
EQ Data (M1–M6)  
0 dB  
0.0 dB  
EQ Wide Trim (M1–M6)  
See Input function default and possible settings on page 64.  
Multi Room  
Room 2 Volume Type  
Room 2 Volume  
SR+  
Variable  
-60  
SR+ Control On/Off  
SR+ Volume Control On/Off  
Monitor Out  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
DSP  
70  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Controlling the rest of your system  
11  
Chapter 11:  
Controlling the rest of your system  
4
Use ꢀ/ꢁ to select the first letter of the brand name  
of your component then press ENTER  
.
Setting the remote to control other  
components  
This should be the manufacturer’s name (for example, P  
for Pioneer).  
Most components can be assigned to one of the input  
source buttons (such as DVD/LD or CD) using the  
component’s manufacturer preset code stored in the  
remote.  
5
Use ꢀ/ꢁ to select the manufacturer’s name from  
the list then press ENTER  
.
6
Use ꢀ/ꢁ to select the proper code from the list,  
then try using this remote with your component.  
The code should start with the component type (for  
example, DVD 020). If there is more than one, start with  
However, there are cases where only certain functions  
may be controllable after assigning the proper preset  
code, or the codes for the manufacturer in the remote  
control will not work for the model that you are using.  
2
the first one.  
If you can’t find a preset code that matches the  
component you want to control, you can still teach the  
remote individual commands from another remote  
control (see Programming signals from other remote  
controls below).  
To try out the remote control, switch the component on or  
off (into standby) by pressing SOURCE ꢁ. If it doesn’t  
seem to work, select the next code from the list (if there  
is one).  
• If you can’t find or properly enter a preset code, you  
can still teach the remote individual commands from  
another remote control (see Programming signals  
from other remote controls below).  
Note  
• You can cancel or exit any of the steps by pressing  
RECEIVER. To go back a step, press RETURN.  
7
If your component is controlled successfully, press  
ENTER to confirm.  
The remote LCD display shows OK.  
• After one minute of inactivity, the remote  
automatically exits the operation.  
Programming signals from other  
remote controls  
Selecting preset codes directly  
SYSTEM OFF  
INPUT  
If the preset code for your component is not available, or  
the available preset codes do not operate correctly, you  
can program signals from the remote control of another  
component. This can also be used to program additional  
operations (buttons not covered in the presets) after  
RECEIVER  
SOURCE  
D.ACCESS  
CLASS  
ENTER  
SELECT  
+
10  
DISC  
AV PARAMETER  
TOP MENU ì  
CH LEVEL  
MENU  
TUNE  
ST  
ST  
T.EDIT  
ì
RETURN  
ENTER  
SETUP  
ꢀ
TUNE  
GUIDEPTY SEARCH  
BAND  
3
CD  
TV  
VIDEO  
2
TV CONTROL  
assigning a preset code.  
DVD  
SAT  
VIDEO 1  
TV CONT  
INPUT  
SELECT  
TV VOL  
TV CH  
VOL  
DVR2  
CD-R  
i Pod  
MULTI IN  
TUNER  
ROOM2/3  
RECEIVER  
1
While pressing the RECEIVER button, press SETUP  
.
DVR1  
The remote LCD display shows SETUP.  
1
While pressing the RECEIVER button, press SETUP  
.
2
Use ꢀ/ꢁ to select LEARNING then press ENTER.  
The remote LCD display shows SETUP.  
The LCD on the remote prompts you for the component  
you want to control (for example DVD or VIDEO 1).  
2
3
Use ꢀ/ꢁ to select PRESET then press ENTER  
.
3
Press the input source button for the component  
Press the input source button for the component  
you want to control then press ENTER  
.
you want to control then press ENTER  
The LCD on the remote displays the component you want  
to control (for example DVD or VIDEO 1).  
.
4
PRES KEY shows in the LCD display.  
1
Note  
1 You can’t assign the RECEIVER, TUNER or iPod buttons.  
2 • When using a Pioneer HDD recorder, please select PIONEER DVR 487, 488, 489 or 493.  
• When using a Pioneer plasma display released prior to summer 2005, please select preset codes 600 or 231.  
The remote can store about 200 preset codes (this has been tested with codes of Pioneer format only).  
3
4 • You can’t assign the RECEIVER, TUNER or iPod buttons.  
• TV CONTROL buttons (TVꢁ,TV VOL +/–, TV CH +/– and INPUT SELECT) can only be learned after selecting TV CONT.  
71  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Controlling the rest of your system  
11  
4
Point the two remote controls towards each other  
then press the button that will be doing the learning on  
this receiver’s remote control.  
PRES KEY starts flashing to indicate the remote is ready  
to accept a signal.  
Erasing one of the remote control  
button settings  
This erases one of the buttons you have programmed and  
restores the button to the factory default.  
• The remote controls should be 3 cm to 5 cm apart.  
1
While pressing the RECEIVER button, press SETUP  
.
3 cm to 5 cm  
The remote LCD display shows SETUP.  
2
Use ꢀ/ꢁ to select ERASE then press ENTER.  
The LCD on the remote prompts you for the component  
corresponding to the button setting to be erased.  
5
Press the corresponding button on the other remote  
control that is sending (teaching) the signal to this  
receiver’s remote control.  
3
Press the input source button corresponding to the  
For example, if you want to learn the playback control  
command to be erased then press ENTER  
The LCD display flashes PRES KEY.  
.
signal, press and hold ꢃ briefly. The LCD display will  
1
show OK if the operation has been learned.  
4
Press and hold the button to be erased for two  
If for some reasons the operation hasn’t been learned the  
LCD will display ERROR briefly and then display PRES  
KEY again. If this happens, keep pressing the (teaching)  
button as you vary the distance between the two remotes,  
seconds.  
The LCD display shows OK or NO CODE to confirm the  
button has been erased.  
2
5
Repeat step 4 to erase other buttons.  
until the LCD display shows OK.  
Certain buttons represent operations that cannot be  
learned from other remote controls. The buttons  
6
Press and hold the RECEIVER button for a couple of  
3
seconds when you’re done.  
available are shown below (with the exception of the TV  
controls, a combination of SHIFT and these buttons can  
also be learned):  
Resetting the remote control presets  
This will erase all preset remote control preset codes and  
programmed buttons.  
SYSTEM OFF  
INPUT  
RECEIVER  
SOURCE  
SELECT  
1
While pressing the RECEIVER button, press SETUP  
.
The remote LCD display shows SETUP.  
2
Use ꢀ/ꢁ to select RESET then press ENTER  
.
CD  
TV  
VIDEO  
2
RESET flashes in the LCD display.  
DVD  
SAT  
VIDEO 1  
TV CONT  
DVR2  
CD-R  
i Pod  
MULTI IN  
TUNER  
ROOM2/3  
RECEIVER  
3
Press and hold ENTER for about two seconds.  
DVR1  
The LCD shows OK to confirm the remote presets have  
been erased.  
SLEEP  
VIDEO  
SEL  
ANALOG  
ATT  
TV CONTROL  
INPUT  
+
SR  
DIMMER  
S.RETRIEVER  
TV VOL  
TV CH  
VOL  
SELECT  
D.ACCESS  
CLASS  
ENTER  
+
10  
DISC  
REC  
MUTE  
Confirming preset codes  
A
B
AV PARAMETER  
TOP MENU ì  
CH LEVEL  
MENU  
MPX  
EON  
REC STOP JUKE BOX  
C
D
E
Use this feature to check which preset code is assigned  
to an input source button.  
TUNE  
ST  
ST  
T.EDIT  
AUDIO SUBTITLE HDD  
DVD  
CH  
ì
RETURN  
ENTER  
SETUP  
DISP  
CH  
ꢀ
PHOTO  
TUNE  
STATUS SIGNAL SEL  
SBch  
STEREO  
GUIDEPTY SEARCH  
BAND  
1
While pressing the RECEIVER button, press SETUP  
.
TV CONTROL  
The remote LCD display shows SETUP.  
6
To program additional signals for the current  
2
Use ꢀ/ꢁ to select READ ID then press ENTER.  
component repeat steps 4 and 5.  
To program signals for another component, exit and  
repeat steps 1 through 5.  
The LCD on the remote prompts you for the input source  
button you want to check.  
3
Press the button of the component for which you  
7
Press and hold the RECEIVER button for a couple of  
want to check the preset code, then press ENTER.  
The brand name and preset code appears in the display  
for three seconds.  
seconds to exit and store the operation(s).  
Note  
1 Note that interference from TVs or other devices will sometimes result in the remote control learning the wrong signal.  
2 • Some commands from other remote controls cannot be learned, but in most cases the remotes just need to be moved closer together or farther apart.  
• If the remote LCD shows FULL, it means the memory is full. See Erasing one of the remote control button settings below to erase a programmed button  
you’re not using to free up more memory (note that some signals may take more memory than others).  
3 Note that the number key decimal button (+10/D.ACCESS) may not be learned with some components.  
72  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Controlling the rest of your system  
Renaming input source names  
11  
Multi Operation and System Off  
You can customize the names that appear on the remote  
LCD when you select an input source (for example, you  
could change the name of DVR 1 to HDD/DVR).  
The Multi Operation feature allows you to program a  
series of up to 5 commands for the components in your  
system. For example, you could turn on your TV, turn on  
your DVD player and start playing the loaded DVD using  
only two buttons on the remote control.  
1
While pressing the RECEIVER button, press SETUP  
.
The remote LCD display shows SETUP.  
Similar to multi operations, System Off allows you to use  
one button to stop and switch off a series of components  
2
Use ꢀ/ꢁ to select RENAME then press ENTER.  
The LCD on the remote prompts you for the button of the  
input source you want to rename.  
2
in your system at the same time.  
3
Press the input source button you want to rename  
Programming a multi-operation or a  
shutdown sequence  
then press ENTER  
.
4
Use ꢀ/ꢁ to select NAME EDT then press ENTER.  
To reset the button to its original (default) name, select  
NAME RST above.  
SYSTEM OFF  
INPUT  
RECEIVER  
SOURCE  
D.ACCESS  
CLASS  
ENTER  
SELECT  
+
10  
DISC  
AV PARAMETER  
TOP MENU ì  
CH LEVEL  
MENU  
5
Edit the name of the input source in the remote  
TUNE  
control LCD, pressing ENTER when you’re finished.  
Use ꢀ/ꢁ to change the character and ꢂ/ꢃ to move  
forward/back a position. The name can be up to eight  
characters (the possible characters are listed below).  
ST  
ST  
T.EDIT  
ì
ENTER  
RETURN  
SETUP  
ꢀ
TUNE  
GUIDEPTY SEARCH  
BAND  
CD  
TV  
VIDEO  
2
TV CONTROL  
DVD  
SAT  
VIDEO 1  
TV CONT  
INPUT  
SELECT  
TV VOL  
TV CH  
VOL  
DVR2  
CD-R  
i Pod  
MULTI IN  
TUNER  
ROOM2/3  
RECEIVER  
DVR1  
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ  
0123456789 \ / * + – [space]  
1
While pressing the RECEIVER button, press SETUP  
.
The remote LCD display shows SETUP.  
Direct function  
2
Use ꢀ/ꢁ to select MULTI OP or SYS OFF from the  
• Default setting: ON  
menu and press ENTER  
.
If you selected Multi Operation (MULTI OP), the LCD on  
the remote prompts you for an input source button.  
You can use the direct function feature to control one  
component using the remote control while at the same  
time, using your receiver to playback a different  
component. This could let you, for example, use the  
remote control to set up and listen to a CD on the receiver  
and then use the remote control to rewind a tape in your  
VCR while you continue to listen to your CD player.  
If you selected System Off (SYSOFF), go to step 4.  
3
Press the input source button for the component  
that will start the multi-operation then press ENTER  
For example, if you want to start the sequence by  
switching on your DVD player, press DVD.  
.
When direct function is on, any component you select  
(using the input source buttons) will be selected by both  
the receiver and the remote control. When you turn direct  
function off, you can operate the remote control without  
4
Use ꢀ/ꢁ to select CODE EDT then press ENTER.  
To erase any previously stored multi-operations (or  
shutdown sequences) select CODE ERS above.  
1
affecting the receiver.  
5
Use ꢀ/ꢁ to select a command in the sequence then  
1
While pressing the RECEIVER button, press SETUP  
.
press ENTER  
.
The remote LCD display shows SETUP.  
If this is the first command in the sequence, select 1ST  
CODE. Otherwise, simply choose the next command in  
the sequence. PRES KEY flashes after you press ENTER.  
2
Use ꢀ/ꢁ to select DIRECT F then press ENTER.  
The LCD on the remote prompts you for the button of the  
input source you want to control.  
6
If necessary, press the input source button for the  
3
Press the input source button for the component  
component whose command you want to input.  
This is only necessary if the command is for a new  
component (input source).  
you want to control then press ENTER  
.
4
Use ꢀ/ꢁ to switch direct function ON or OFF then  
press ENTER  
.
The LCD shows OK to confirm the setting.  
Note  
1 You can’t use direct function with the TV CONT function.  
2 • Before Multi Operation and System Off will work correctly, you must setup the remote to work with your TV and other components (see Setting the  
remote to control other components on page 71 for more on this).  
• Some units may take some time to power up, in which case multiple operations may not be possible.  
• Power on and off commands only work with components that have a standby mode.  
73  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Controlling the rest of your system  
11  
7
Select the button for the command you want to  
Using multi operations  
input.  
You can start multi operations with the receiver switched  
The following remote control commands can be  
selected:  
on, or in standby.  
PHOTO  
STATUS SIGNAL SEL  
SBch  
STEREO  
MULTI OPE  
SHIFT  
THX  
STANDARD ADV. SURR  
SYSTEM OFF  
INPUT  
RECEIVER  
SOURCE  
SELECT  
PHASE  
MCACC  
S.DIRECT  
RECEIVER  
CD  
TV  
VIDEO  
2
1
Press MULTI OPE.  
DVD  
SAT  
VIDEO 1  
TV CONT  
DVR2  
CD-R  
i Pod  
MULTI IN  
TUNER  
ROOM2/3  
RECEIVER  
MULTI OP flashes in the display.  
DVR1  
SLEEP  
VIDEO  
SEL  
ANALOG  
ATT  
2
Press an input source button that has been set up  
+
with a multi operation.  
The receiver switches on (if it was in standby) and the  
programmed multi operation is performed automatically.  
SR  
DIMMER  
S.RETRIEVER  
TV CONTROL  
INPUT  
TV VOL  
TV CH  
VOL  
SELECT  
D.ACCESS  
CLASS  
ENTER  
+
10  
DISC  
REC  
MUTE  
A
B
AV PARAMETER  
CH LEVEL  
MENU  
TOP MENU ì  
Using System off  
TUNE  
MPX  
EON  
REC STOP JUKE BOX  
C
D
E
ST  
ST  
T.EDIT  
ì
ENTER  
RETURN  
SETUP  
AUDIO SUBTITLE HDD  
DVD  
CH  
ꢀ
DISP  
CH  
PHOTO  
STATUS SIGNAL SEL SBch  
SYSTEM OFF  
SOURCE  
TUNE  
PHOTO  
STATUS SIGNAL SEL  
GUIDEPTY SEARCH  
BAND  
INPUT  
SELECT  
STEREO  
RECEIVER  
SBch  
STEREO  
TV CONTROL  
MULTI OPE  
SHIFT  
THX  
STANDARD ADV. SURR  
PHASE  
MCACC  
S.DIRECT  
• You don't need to program the receiver to switch on  
or off. This is done automatically.  
With Pioneer components, you don’t need to:  
CD  
TV  
VIDEO  
2
RECEIVER  
DVD  
SAT  
VIDEO 1  
TV CONT  
• program the power to switch off in a shutdown  
sequence (except DVD recorders);  
1
Press MULTI OPE.  
MULTI OP flashes in the display.  
• program the power to switch on if it’s the source  
component selected in step 3;  
2
Press SOURCEꢁ.  
The command sequence you programmed will run, then  
all Pioneer components will switch off , followed by this  
receiver.  
• program a Pioneer TV or monitor to switch on if the  
input function (selected in step 2) has video input  
terminals;  
1
These take priority in multi operations (not shutdown).  
8
Repeat steps 5–7 to program a sequence of up to  
five commands.  
9
When you’re finished, use ꢀ/ꢁ to select EDITEXIT  
from the menu and press ENTER  
.
You will return to the remote control SETUP menu. Select  
* EXIT * again to exit.  
Note  
1 In order to avoid accidently switching off a DVD recorder that is currently recording, no DVD recorder power off codes are sent.  
74  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Controlling the rest of your system  
11  
Controls for TVs  
Controls for other components  
This remote control can control components after  
entering the proper codes or teaching the receiver the  
commands (see Setting the remote to control other  
components on page 71 for more on this). Use the input  
source buttons to select the component.  
This remote control can control these components after  
entering the proper codes or teaching the receiver the  
commands (see Setting the remote to control other  
components on page 71 for more on this). Use the input  
source buttons to select the component.  
• The TV CONTROL buttons on the remote control are  
dedicated to control the TV assigned to the TV CONT  
button. If you have two TVs, assign the main TV to the  
TV CONT button.  
Button (s) Function  
Components  
SOURCEꢁ Press to switch the component  
CD/MD/CD-R/  
VCR/DVD/LD/  
DVR player/  
between standby and on.  
Cassette deck  
Button(s) Function  
Components  
ꢇ
ꢆ
ꢅ
Press to return to the start of the  
current track or chapter.  
CD/MD/CD-R/  
DVD/LD player  
TVꢁ  
Press to switch the component  
assigned to the TV CONT  
Cable TV/Satellite  
TV/TV  
Repeated presses skips to the start  
of previous tracks or chapters.  
button on or off.  
Press to advance to the start of the CD/MD/CD-R/  
INPUT  
SELECT  
Switches the TV input. (Not  
possible with all models.)  
TV  
next track or chapter.  
DVD/LD player  
Repeated presses skips to the start  
of following tracks or chapters.  
TV CH +/– Selects channels.  
Cable TV/Satellite  
TV/TV  
Pause playback or recording.  
CD/MD/CD-R/  
VCR/DVD/LD/  
DVR player/  
TV VOL +/– Adjust the TV volume.  
Cable TV/Satellite  
TV/TV  
Cassette deck  
SOURCEꢁ Switches the TV or CATV between Cable TV/Satellite  
standby and on. TV/TV  
ꢃ
Start playback.  
CD/MD/CD-R/  
VCR/DVD/LD/  
DVR player/  
ꢈ
Use to choose the ‘A’ commands Satellite TV  
on a Satellite TV menu.  
Cassette deck  
ꢇ
Use to choose the RED/B  
commands on a Satellite TV/TV  
menu.  
Satellite TV/TV  
Satellite TV/TV  
Satellite TV/TV  
Satellite TV/TV  
Satellite TV/TV  
ꢉ
ꢈ
ꢄ
Hold down for fast forward  
playback.  
CD/MD/CD-R/  
VCR/DVD/LD/  
DVR player/  
Cassette deck  
ꢆ
ꢅ
Use to choose the CYAN/E  
commands on a Satellite TV/TV  
menu.  
Hold down for fast reverse  
playback.  
CD/MD/CD-R/  
VCR/DVD/LD/  
DVR player/  
Use to choose the GREEN/C  
commands on a Satellite TV/TV  
menu.  
Cassette deck  
Stops playback.  
Starts recording.  
CD/MD/CD-R/  
VCR/DVD/LD/  
DVR player/  
ꢄ
Use to choose the YELLOW/D  
commands on a Satellite TV/TV  
menu.  
Cassette deck  
ì REC  
(SHIFT+ꢃ)  
MD/CD-R/VCR/  
DVR player/  
Cassette deck  
AUDIO / DISP Use to switch audio tracks.  
SUBTITLE  
Use to return to the previously  
selected channel.  
Cable TV/Satellite  
TV/TV  
REC STOP Stops recording.  
(SHIFT+ꢄ)  
DVR player  
DVR player  
GUIDE  
Use as the GUIDE button for  
navigating.  
Cable TV/Satellite  
TV/TV  
JUKEBOX Switches to the Jukebox feature.  
(SHIFT+ꢆ)  
Switches TEXT OFF for TVs.  
TV  
Number  
buttons  
Directly access tracks on a  
program source.  
CD/MD/CD-R/  
VCR/LD player  
RETURN  
Use to select RETURN or EXIT.  
Satellite TV/TV  
Number  
buttons  
Use to select a specific TV  
channel.  
Cable TV/Satellite  
TV/TV  
Use the number buttons to  
navigate the on-screen display.  
DVD/DVR player  
+10 button Use to add a decimal point when Satellite TV/TV  
+10 button Selects tracks higher than 10. (For CD/MD/CD-R/  
selecting a specific TV channel.  
example, press +10 then 3 to  
VCR/LD player  
select track 13.)  
ENTER/  
DISC  
Use to enter a channel.  
Select the menu screen.  
Cable TV/Satellite  
TV/TV  
ENTER/  
DISC  
Chooses the disc.  
Multiple CD  
player  
MENU  
Cable TV/Satellite  
TV/TV  
Use as the ENTER button.  
VCR/DVD  
ꢀ/ꢁ/ꢂ/ꢃ Press to select or adjust and  
Cable TV/Satellite  
TV/TV  
Displays the setup screen for DVR DVR player  
players.  
& ENTER  
navigate items on the menu  
screen.  
Changes sides of the LD.  
LD player  
TOP MENU Switches TEXT ON for TVs.  
TV  
75  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Controlling the rest of your system  
11  
Button (s) Function  
Components  
Operating other Pioneer components  
with this unit’s sensor  
TOP MENU Displays the disc ‘top’ menu of a DVD/DVR player  
DVD player.  
MENU  
Displays menus concerning the  
current DVD or DVR you are using.  
DVD/DVR player  
Many Pioneer components have SR CONTROL jacks  
which can be used to link components together so that  
you can use just the remote sensor of one component.  
When you use a remote control, the control signal is  
ꢀ
Pauses the tape.  
Stops the tape.  
Starts playback.  
Cassette deck  
Cassette deck  
Cassette deck  
Cassette deck  
ꢁ
1
ENTER  
ꢂ/ꢃ  
passed along the chain to the appropriate component.  
Fast rewinds/fast forwards the  
tape.  
Important  
ꢀ/ꢁ/ꢂ/ꢃ Navigates DVD menu/options.  
DVD/DVR player  
DVD/DVR player  
& ENTER  
• Note that if you use this feature, make sure that you  
also have at least one set of analog audio or video jacks  
connected to another component for grounding  
purposes.  
GUIDE  
Press to access the DVD player  
setup screen.  
CH +/–  
Selects channels.  
VCR/DVD/DVR  
player  
1
Decide which component you want to use the  
AUDIO  
SUBTITLE  
Changes the audio language or  
channel.  
DVD/DVR player  
remote sensor of.  
When you want to control any component in the chain,  
this is the remote sensor at which you’ll point the  
corresponding remote control.  
Displays/changes the subtitles on DVD/DVR player  
multilingual DVDs.  
SHIFT  
+SUBTITLE  
Switches to the VCR controls when VCR/DVD/DVR  
using a VCR/DVD/HDD recorder.  
player  
2
Connect the CONTROL OUT jack of that component  
HDD  
(SHIFT +  
CH–)  
Switches to the hard disk controls DVR player  
when using a DVD/HDD recorder.  
to the CONTROL IN jack of another Pioneer component.  
Use a cable with a mono mini-plug on each end for the  
connection.  
DVD(SHIFT Switches to the DVD controls  
DVR player  
+ CH+)  
when using a DVD/HDD recorder.  
AUDIO  
PHONO  
PRE OUT  
L
ANTENNA  
R
P
IN  
&
SOURCE  
L
2(ZONE2)  
SUB W.  
CD  
IN  
CONTROL  
CONTROL  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
OUT  
CD-R/  
TAPE  
R
L
IN  
R
L
FR  
FL  
iPod  
IN  
SUB W.  
CENTER  
SUR-  
ROUND  
R
R
L
L
232C  
SURROND  
BACK  
MULTI CH  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
L
CONTROL  
UDIO  
3
Continue the chain in the same way for as many  
components as you have.  
Note  
1 • If you want to control all your components using this receiver’s remote control, refer to Setting the remote to control other components on page 71.  
If you have connected a remote control to the CONTROL IN jack (using a mini-plug cable), you won't be able to control this unit using the remote sensor.  
• See Using this receiver with a Pioneer plasma display on page 60 if you are connecting a Pioneer plasma display.  
76  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
12  
Chapter 12:  
Additional information  
Troubleshooting  
Incorrect operations are often mistaken for trouble and malfunctions. If you think that there is something wrong with  
this component, check the points below. Sometimes the trouble may lie in another component. Investigate the other  
components and electrical appliances being used. If the trouble cannot be rectified even after exercising the checks  
listed below, ask your nearest Pioneer authorized independent service company to carry out repair work.  
Power  
Symptom  
Remedy  
The power does not turn on.  
• Make sure that the power cable is plugged in to an active power outlet.  
• Try disconnecting from the power outlet, then plugging back in.  
The receiver suddenly switches • Check that there are no loose strands of speaker wire touching the rear panel or another set of wires. If  
off or the Phase Control indicator so, re-attach the speaker wires, making sure there are no stray strands.  
blinks.  
• The receiver may have a serious problem. Disconnect from the power and call a Pioneer authorized  
independent service company.  
During loud playback the power • Turn down the volume.  
suddenly switches off. • Lower the 63 Hz and 125 Hz equalizer levels in the Manual MCACC setup on page 38.  
• Try switching on the digital safety feature (put the receiver into standby, hold down the SETUP button on  
the front panel and press ꢁ STANDBY/ON to switch between SAFETY 1 (medium effect), SAFETY 2 (more  
effect) and SAFETY OFF. If the power switches off even with SAFETY 2 switched on, turn down the volume.  
With SAFETY 1 or SAFETY 2 on, some features may be unavailable.  
The unit does not respond when • Try switching the receiver off then back on again.  
the buttons are pressed.  
• Try disconnecting the power cable, then connect again.  
AMP ERR blinks in the display,  
then the power automatically  
switches off. The MCACC blinks  
and the power does not turn on.  
• The receiver may have a serious problem. Do not try switching the receiver on. Contact a Pioneer  
authorized independent service company for help.  
FAN STOP blinks in the display, • Something is obstructing the fan. Remove the obstruction and try switching the receiver back on. If the  
then the power automatically  
switches off.  
fan is still not working, or you can't remove the object, unplug the receiver from the wall and call a Pioneer  
authorized independent service company.  
• The fan is malfunctioning. Unplug the receiver from the wall and call a Pioneer authorized independent  
service company.  
OVERHEAT blinks in the display • Allow the unit to cool down in a well-ventilated place before switching back on. Check the safety  
then the power automatically  
switches off.  
precautions on pages 2–3 for information on improving heat dispersal.  
The receiver suddenly switches • The receiver may have a serious problem. Disconnect from the power and call a Pioneer authorized  
off or DIGITAL PRECISION  
PROCESSING blinks in the  
display.  
independent service company.  
77  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
12  
No sound  
Symptom  
Remedy  
No sound is output when an  
input source is selected.  
• Check the volume, mute setting (press MUTE) and speaker setting (press SPEAKERS).  
• Make sure the correct input source is selected.  
No sound output from the front • Check that the MCACC setup microphone is disconnected.  
speakers. • Make sure the correct input signal is selected (press SIGNAL SELECT). Note that when PCM is selected,  
you won’t be able to hear any other signal format.  
• Check that the source component is connected properly (see Connecting your equipment on page 10).  
• Check that the speakers are connected properly (see Connecting the speakers on page 17).  
No sound from the surround or • Check that the Stereo listening mode isn’t selected; select one of the surround listening modes (see  
center speakers.  
Listening in surround sound on page 28).  
• Check that the surround/center speakers are not set to NO (see Speaker Setting on page 45).  
• Check the channel level settings (see Channel Level on page 45).  
• Check the speaker connections (see Connecting the speakers on page 17).  
No sound from surround back  
speakers.  
• Check that the surround back speakers are set to LARGE or SMALL (see Speaker Setting on page 45).  
• Make sure surround back processing is set to SBch ON (see Using surround back channel processing on  
page 31).  
• If the source is Dolby Surround EX or DTS ES with no flag to indicate 6.1 compatibility, then with surround  
back processing set to SBch Auto, there will be no sound from the surround back speakers. In this case,  
set to SBch ON (see Using surround back channel processing on page 31).  
• If the source does not have 6.1 playback channels, make sure that surround back processing is set to  
SBch ON and a surround mode is selected (see Listening in surround sound on page 28).  
• Check the speaker connections (see Connecting the speakers on page 17). If only one surround back  
speaker is connected, make sure it’s connected to the left channel speaker terminal.  
No sound from subwoofer.  
• Check that the subwoofer is connected properly, switched on and the volume turned up.  
• If your subwoofer has a sleep function, make sure it is switched off.  
• Make sure that the Subwoofer setting is YES or PLUS (see Speaker Setting on page 45).  
• The crossover frequency may be set too low; try setting it higher to match the characteristics of your other  
speakers (see Speaker Setting on page 45)  
• If there is very little low frequency information in the source material, change your speaker settings to  
Front: SMALL / Subwoofer: YES, or Front: LARGE / Subwoofer: PLUS (see Speaker Setting on page 45).  
• Check that the LFE channel is not set to –80 dB, or a very quiet setting (see Bass Peak Level on page 46).  
• Check the speaker level settings (see Channel Level on page 45).  
No sound from one speaker.  
• Check the speaker connection (see Connecting the speakers on page 17).  
• Check the speaker level settings (see Channel Level on page 45).  
• Check that the speaker hasn’t been set to NO (see Speaker Setting on page 45).  
• The channel may not be recorded in the source. By using one of the advanced effect listening mode, you  
may be able to create the missing channel (see Listening in surround sound on page 28).  
Sound is produced from analog • Check that the input signal type is set to DIGITAL (see Choosing the input signal on page 31).  
components, but not from digital • Make sure that the digital input is assigned correctly for the input jack the component is connected to  
ones (DVD, LD, CD-ROM etc.).  
(see The Input Setup menu on page 63).  
• Check the digital output settings on the source component.  
• If the source component has a digital volume control, make sure this is not turned down.  
• Make sure that the multichannel analog inputs are not selected. Select any other input source.  
No sound is output or a noise is • Check that your DVD player is compatible with Dolby Digital/DTS discs.  
output when Dolby Digital/DTS  
software is played back.  
• Check the digital output settings of your DVD player. Make sure that the DTS signal output is set to On.  
• If the source component has a digital volume control, make sure this is not turned down.  
No sound when using the System • If the HDMI input source is selected, sound is muted until exiting either menu.  
Setup or Status menu.  
• If sound is muted in the sub room (ROOM 2), it will be restored after exiting the System Setup menu.  
78  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
12  
Other audio problems  
Symptom  
Remedy  
Broadcast stations cannot be  
For FM broadcasts  
selected automatically, or there is • Fully extend the FM wire antenna, adjust the position for best reception and secure to a wall, etc.  
considerable noise in radio  
broadcasts.  
• Use an outdoor antenna for better reception (see page 20).  
For AM broadcasts  
• Adjust the position and direction of the AM antenna.  
• Use an outdoor antenna for better reception (see page 20).  
• Noise may be caused by interference from other equipment, such as a fluorescent light, motor, etc.  
Switch off or move the other equipment, or move the AM antenna.  
A multichannel DVD source  
appears to be downmixed to 2  
channels during playback.  
• Make sure that the multichannel analog inputs are selected (see Selecting the multichannel analog inputs  
on page 53).  
Noise is output when scanning a • This is not a malfunction of the receiver. The scan function of your player alters the digital information,  
DTS CD.  
making it unreadable, resulting in noise being output. Lower the volume when scanning.  
When playing a DTS format LD  
there is audible noise on the  
soundtrack.  
• Make sure that the input signal type is set to DIGITAL (see Choosing the input signal on page 31).  
Can't record audio.  
• You can only make a digital recording from a digital source, and an analog recording from an analog  
source.  
• For digital sources, make sure that what you’re recording isn’t copy protected.  
• Check that the OUT jacks are properly connected to the recorders input jacks (see Connecting analog  
audio sources on page 16).  
Recorded audio is different from • The RECOUT source is set to an input source other than the source you’re listening to. Select RECOUT  
the current source, or inaudible. SOURCE to record the current input source (see Playing a different source when recording on page 68).  
Subwoofer output is very low.  
• To route more signal to the subwoofer, set it to PLUS or set the front speakers to SMALL (see Speaker  
Setting on page 45).  
Everything seems to be set up  
correctly, but the playback sound  
is odd.  
• The speakers may be out of phase. Check that the positive/negative speaker terminals on the receiver are  
matched with the corresponding terminals on the speakers (see Connecting the speakers on page 17).  
The PHASE CONTROL feature  
• If applicable, check that the lowpass filter switch on your subwoofer is off, or the lowpass cutoff is set to  
doesn’t seem to have an audible the highest frequency setting. If there is a PHASE setting on your subwoofer, set it to 0º (or depending on  
effect.  
the subwoofer, the setting where you think it has the best overall effect on the sound).  
• Make sure the speaker distance setting is correct for all speakers (see Speaker Distance on page 46).  
Noise or hum can be heard even • Check that personal computers or other digital components connected to the same power source are not  
when there is no sound being  
input.  
causing interference.  
There seems to be a time lag  
between the speakers and the  
output of the subwoofer.  
• See Automatically setting up for surround sound (MCACC) on page 7 to set up your system again using  
MCACC (this will automatically compensate for a delay in the subwoofer output).  
The maximum volume available • This is not a malfunction. If the levels in Channel Level on page 45 have been adjusted, the maximum  
(shown in the front panel display) volume will change accordingly.  
is lower than the +12dB  
maximum.  
79  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
12  
Video  
Symptom  
Remedy  
No image is output when an  
input is selected.  
• Check the video connections of the source component (see page 13).  
• For high-definition video (using component video connections), or when digital video conversion is  
switched off (in Setting the AV options on page 66), you must connect your TV to this receiver using the same  
type of video cable as you used to connect your video component.  
• Make sure the input assignment is correct for components connected using component or S-video cables  
(see The Input Setup menu on page 63).  
• A separate video source has been selected using VIDEO SELECT (see Watching video and audio sources  
independently on page 68).  
• Check the video output settings of the source component.  
• Check that the video input you selected on your TV is correct.  
• Some components (such as video game units) have resolutions that may not be converted. If adjusting  
this receiver’s Resolution setting (in Setting the AV options on page 66) and/or the resolution settings on  
your component or display doesn’t work, try switching Digital Video Conversion (in Setting the AV options  
on page 66) OFF.  
Can’t record video.  
• Check that the source is not copy-protected.  
• The video converter is not available when making recordings. Check that the same type of video cable is  
used for connecting both the recorder and the video source (the one you want to record) to this receiver.  
Settings  
Symptom  
Remedy  
The Auto MCACC Setup  
continually shows an error.  
• The ambient noise level may be too high. Keep the noise level in the room as low as possible (see also  
Problems when using the Auto MCACC Setup on page 9). If the noise level cannot be kept low enough, you  
will have to set up the surround sound manually (page 44).  
After using the Auto MCACC  
Setup, the speaker size setting is  
incorrect.  
• There may have been some low frequency noise in the room from an air-conditioner, motor, etc. Switch  
off all other appliances in the room and use Auto MCACC Setup again.  
• Depending on a number of factors (room size, speaker placement, etc.) this may occur in some cases.  
Change the speaker setting manually in Speaker Setting on page 45, and use the ALL (Keep SPsetting)  
option for the Auto Mode in Automatic MCACC (Expert) on page 35 if this is a recurring problem.  
Can’t adjust the Fine Speaker  
Distance setting (page 39)  
properly.  
• Check that the speakers are all in phase (make sure the positive (+) and negative (–) terminals are  
matched up properly).  
The display shows KEY LOCK  
ON when you try to make  
settings.  
• With the receiver in standby, press ꢁ STANDBY/ON while holding down the MULTI-ROOM&SOURCE  
CONTROL button to disable the key lock.  
Most recent settings have been • The power cord was disconnected from the wall while adjusting this setting.  
erased.  
Professional Calibration EQ graphical output  
Symptom  
Remedy  
The EQ response displayed in the • There are cases where the graph does not appear flat (even when selecting ALL CH ADJUST in the Auto  
graphical output following  
calibration does not appear  
entirely flat.  
MCACC Setup) due to adjustments made to compensate for room characteristics to achieve optimal sound.  
• Areas of the graph may appear identical (before and after) when there is little or no adjustment needed.  
• The graph may appear to have shifted vertically when comparing before and after measurements.  
EQ adjustments made using the • Despite level adjustments being made, the filters used for analysis may not display these adjustments in  
Manual MCACC setup on  
page 38 do not appear to change  
the graphical output.  
the graphical output. However, these adjustments are taken this into account by the filters dedicated to  
overall system calibration.  
Lower frequency response  
curves do not seem to have been  
calibrated for SMALL speakers.  
• Low frequencies used in bass management (the subwoofer channel) will not change for speakers that  
have been specified as SMALL in the configuration, or do not output these frequencies.  
• Calibration is performed, but due to your speakers’ low frequency limitations, no measurable sound is  
output for display.  
Graphical output data seems to • If the power is switched off, the measurement data for graphical output to a PC is cleared.  
have disappeared.  
80  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
12  
Display  
Symptom  
Remedy  
The display is dark or off.  
• Press DIMMER on the remote control repeatedly to select a different brightness.  
After making an adjustment the • Press DIMMER on the remote control repeatedly to select a different brightness.  
display goes off.  
You can't get DIGITAL to display • Check the digital connections and make sure that the digital inputs are assigned correctly (see The Input  
when using the SIGNAL SELECT Setup menu on page 63).  
button.  
• If the multichannel analog inputs are selected, select a different input source.  
The Dolby/DTS indicator doesn't • These indicators do dot light if playback is paused.  
light when playing Dolby/DTS  
software.  
• Check the playback (especially the digital output) settings of the source component.  
When playing a DVD-Audio disc, • This is not a malfunction. 96 kHz audio from DVD-Audio discs is only output from the analog outputs of  
the DVD player display shows  
96 kHz. However, the receiver’s  
display does not.  
the DVD player. This receiver cannot show the playback sample rate when using the analog inputs.  
During playback of a DTS 96/24 • Make sure that the receiver is set to AUTO or DIGITAL (see Choosing the input signal on page 31).  
source, the display doesn't show  
96 kHz.  
When playing Dolby Digital or  
DTS sources, the receiver’s  
format indicators do not light.  
• Check that the player is connected using a digital connection.  
• Make sure that the receiver is set to AUTO or DIGITAL (see Choosing the input signal on page 31).  
• Check that the player isn’t set up so that Dolby Digital and DTS sources are converted to PCM.  
• Ensure that if there are several audio tracks on the disc, the Dolby Digital or DTS is selected.  
When playing certain discs, none • The disc may not contain 5.1/6.1 channel material. Check the disc packaging for more on what audio  
of the receiver’s format  
indicators light.  
tracks are recorded on the disc.  
When playing a disc, the  
• Make sure that the receiver is set to AUTO or DIGITAL (see Choosing the input signal on page 31).  
2PL II or Neo:6 indicator lights • If a two channel soundtrack is currently playing (including Dolby Surround encoded), then this is not a  
on the receiver.  
malfunction. Check the disc packaging for details about the audio tracks available.  
During playback of a Surround  
•The source may be Dolby Surround EX / DTS ES software, but it has no flag to indicate it is 6.1  
EX or DTS ES source on the SBch compatible. Set to SBch ON (see Using surround back channel processing on page 31) then switch to the  
AUTO setting, the EX and ES  
indicators don’t light, or the  
signal is not properly processed.  
THX Surround EX or Standard EX listening mode (see Listening in surround sound on page 28).  
During playback of DVD-Audio, •This will occur when playing DVD-Audio material over the HDMI connection. This is not a malfunction.  
the display shows PCM.  
Remote control  
Symptom  
Remedy  
Cannot be remote controlled.  
• Try replacing the batteries in the remote control (see Loading the batteries on page 6).  
• Be sure to operate within 7 meters and a 30º angle of the remote sensor on the front panel (see Operating  
range of remote control unit on page 23).  
• Check that there are no obstacles between the receiver and the remote control.  
• Make sure that there is no fluorescent or other strong light shining on to the remote sensor.  
• Check the connections of the CONTROL IN jack (see Operating other Pioneer components with this unit’s  
sensor on page 76).  
Other components can't be  
operated with the system remote.  
• If the battery ran down, the preset codes may have been cleared. Re-enter the preset codes.  
• The preset code may be incorrect. Redo the procedure for entering preset codes.  
The SR cable is connected, but  
the connected components can’t plasma display on page 60).  
be operated with the remote.  
• Reinsert the SR cable, making sure it’s connected to the right jack (see Using this receiver with a Pioneer  
• Make sure that there is an analog connection between the units. This is necessary for the SR feature to  
work.  
• Check that the other component is made by Pioneer. The SR feature only works with Pioneer equipment.  
81  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
12  
i.LINK interface  
Symptom  
Remedy  
No sound is output.  
• Check that the source player is compatible with i.LINK audio.  
• Check the output settings of the source player.  
• Make sure that i.LINK or AUTO is selected using the SIGNAL SELECT button (see Choosing the input  
signal on page 31).  
The i.LINK indicator does not  
light up even when an i.LINK-  
equipped component is selected.  
• Make sure that i.LINK or AUTO is selected using the SIGNAL SELECT button (see Choosing the input  
signal on page 31).  
• Check the i.LINK connections; use an i.LINK cable of less than 3.5 m.  
• Check that the source components conforms to the i.LINK Audio format.  
• Make sure that all components connected between the receiver and the source are switched on.  
PQLS OFF or PQLS ON is  
displayed temporarily on your  
player and the sound output is  
discontinued.  
• During playback through an i.LINK connection, if you change the settings for other i.LINK components,  
the sound will be discontinued momentarily. This is not a malfunction.  
The program format indicators  
don’t disappear when SACD  
playback stops.  
• The program format indicators remain lit until another format source is input. This is not a malfunction.  
You can’t get i.LINK to display  
when using the SIGNAL SELECT  
button.  
• Make sure your i.LINK source components are switched on.  
• Check that i.LINK is assigned correctly (see The Input Setup menu on page 63).  
After upgrading a component, it • You may need to reset the i.LINK database memory in the receiver (use the front panel):  
is not recognized and cannot be With the receiver in standby, press ꢁ STANDBY/ON while holding down RETURN. When you see DB  
selected using the i.LINK  
connection.  
CLEAR? appear in the display, press ENTER, then SETUP again to confirm. When you’ve reset the i.LINK  
database memory, DB CLEAR SET shows in the display. If DB ERROR is displayed, step through the  
procedure again.  
i.LINK messages  
You may see the following messages displayed in the front panel display when using the i.LINK interface.  
Message  
Explanation  
BUS FULL  
The i.LINK bus has reached its capacity and cannot transmit any more data.  
CANNOT LINK 1  
The connection between the receiver and the selected i.LINK-equipped component is unstable. If the  
i.LINK cables appear to be connected properly and both the receiver and i.LINK-equipped component are  
on, switch both units off, then on again to re-establish the connection between them.  
CANNOT LINK 2  
LINK CHECK  
LOOP CONNECT  
NO NAME  
The receiver can’t identify the selected i.LINK-equipped component. For example, the receiver may not be  
able to identify an i.LINK-equipped personal computer.  
The receiver is checking the i.LINK network. It does this when components are added to, or removed from  
the network. The sound may be interrupted if this happens during playback.  
The i.LINK network cannot function because the connected components form a loop. See Creating an  
i.LINK network on page 52 for more on this.  
When an i.LINK-equipped component has no name, this message is displayed instead of the proper  
component name.  
NO SIGNAL  
PQLS OFF  
A component is outputting an i.LINK signal that the receiver cannot reproduce. This receiver can only  
reproduce signals from i.LINK-Audio-equipped components. See About i.LINK on page 52 for more on this.  
This is displayed on a playback component when PQLS turns off during playback. The sound may be  
interrupted momentarily when this happens.  
PQLS ON  
This is displayed on a playback component when PQLS turns on during playback. The sound may be  
interrupted momentarily when this happens.  
UNKNOWN  
When an i.LINK-equipped component name cannot be recognized, this message is displayed instead of  
the proper component name.  
82  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
12  
USB interface  
Symptom  
Remedy  
No sound.  
• Make sure you have set up your computer system to output through the USB interface (see Using the USB  
interface on page 54).  
• Make sure your computers output level is turned up.  
• Update to a more recent version of your software, try a different audio program, or try a different source.  
HDMI  
Symptom  
Remedy  
The HDMI indicator blinks  
continuously.  
• Check all the points below.  
No picture or sound.  
• This receiver is HDCP-compatible. Check that the components you are connecting are also HDCP-  
compatible. If they are not, please connect them using the component, S-video or composite video jacks.  
• Depending on the connected source component, it’s possible that it will not work with this receiver (even  
if it is HDCP-compatible). In this case, connect using the component, S-video or composit video jacks  
between source and receiver.  
• If the problem still persists when connecting your HDMI component directly to your monitor, please  
consult the component or monitor manual or contact the manufacturer for support.  
No picture.  
• Try changing the Resolution setting (in Setting the AV options on page 66).  
No sound, or sound suddenly  
ceases.  
• Check that the HDMI AV setting is set to AMP/THROUGH.  
• If the component is a DVI device, use a separate connection for the audio.  
• If analog video is being output over HDMI then there will be no HDMI audio output. Please use a separate  
connection for the audio.  
• Check the audio output settings of the source component.  
Noisy or distorted picture.  
• Sometimes a video deck may output a noisy video signal (during scanning, for example), or the video  
quality may just be poor (with some video game units, for example). The picture quality may also depend on  
the settings, etc. of your display device. Switch off the video converter and reconnect the source and display  
device using the same type of connection (component, S-video or composite), then start playback again.  
• If the problem still persists when connecting your HDMI component directly to your monitor, please  
consult the component or monitor manual or contact the manufacturer for support.  
iPod messages  
Symptom  
Error I1  
Cause  
Action  
There is a problem with the signal path from the Switch off the receiver and reconnect the iPod to the receiver.  
iPod to the receiver.  
If this doesn’t seem to work, try resetting your iPod.  
Error I2  
The software version being used with the iPod  
needs to be updated.  
Update the software being used with the iPod (software  
versions prior to iPod update 2004-10-20 are not supported).  
No Track  
There are no playable songs currently stored in Input some music files compatible with iPod playback.  
the iPod.  
Note  
• If the unit does not operate normally due to external effects such as static electricity disconnect the power plug  
from the outlet and insert again to return to normal operating conditions.  
83  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
Surround sound formats  
12  
Dolby Surround is an encoding system which embeds  
surround sound information within a stereo soundtrack,  
which a Dolby Pro Logic decoder can then use for enhanced  
surround listening with greater sound detail.  
Below is a brief description of the main surround sound  
formats you’ll find on DVDs, satellite, cable and terrestrial  
broadcasts, and video cassettes.  
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby”,  
“Pro Logic”, “Surround EX”, and the double-D symbol are  
trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.  
Dolby  
The Dolby technologies are explained below. See  
www.dolby.com for more detailed information.  
DTS  
The DTS technologies are explained below. See  
www.dtstech.com for more detailed information.  
Dolby Digital  
DTS Digital Surround  
Dolby Digital is a multichannel digital audio coding system  
widely used in cinemas, and in the home for DVD and digital  
broadcast soundtracks. It can deliver up to six discrete audio  
channels, comprising five full range channels and a special  
LFE (low frequency effects) channel used mainly for deep,  
rumbling sound effects; hence the term “5.1-channel” Dolby  
Digital.  
DTS Digital Surround is a 5.1-channel audio coding system  
from Digital Theater Systems Inc. now widely used for DVD-  
Video, DVD-Audio, 5.1 music discs, digital broadcasts, and  
video games. It can deliver up to six discrete audio channels,  
comprising five full range channels, including an LFE  
channel. Higher sound quality is achieved through the use of  
a low compression rate, and high rates of transmittance  
during playback.  
In addition to the format features above, Dolby Digital  
decoders offer downmixing for compatibility with mono,  
stereo and Dolby Pro Logic audio from a number of bit rates  
and channels. Another feature, called Dialog Normalization,  
attenuates programs based on the average level of dialog in  
a program relative to its peak level (also known as Dialnorm)  
in order to achieve uniform playback level.  
DTS-ES  
DTS-ES (the ES stands for Extended Surround) is a decoder  
that is capable of decoding both DTS-ES Discrete 6.1 and  
DTS-ES Matrix 6.1 encoded sources. DTS-ES Discrete 6.1  
gives ‘true’ 6.1 channel sound, with a completely separate  
(discrete) surround back channel. DTS-ES Matrix 6.1 has a  
surround back channel matrixed into the surround left/right  
channels. Both sources are also compatible with a  
conventional DTS 5.1 channel decoder.  
Dolby Digital Surround EX  
Dolby Digital Surround EX (the EX stands for EXtended) is an  
extension of Dolby Digital encoding whereby a surround  
back channel is matrixed into the surround left/right  
channels for 6.1 channel playback. This allows for  
compatibility with Dolby Digital 5.1 channel decoding, as  
well as for decoding using Dolby Digital EX.  
DTS Neo:6  
DTS Neo:6 can generate 6.1 channel surround sound from  
any matrixed stereo source (such as video or TV) and from  
5.1 channel sources. It uses both the channel information  
already encoded into the source, as well as its own  
processing to determine channel localization (with two  
channel sources, the “.1” subwoofer channel is generated by  
bass management in the receiver). Two modes (Cinema and  
Music) are available using DTS Neo:6 with two channel  
sources.  
Dolby Pro Logic IIx and Dolby Surround  
Dolby Pro Logic IIx is an improved version of the Dolby Pro  
Logic II (and Dolby Pro Logic) decoding system. Using the  
innovative “steering logic” circuit, this system extracts  
surround sound from sources as follows:  
DTS 96/24  
• Dolby Pro Logic – 4.1 channel sound (mono surround)  
DTS 96/24 is an extension of the original DTS Digital  
Surround which offers high quality 96 kHz/24-bit audio using  
a DTS 96/24 decoder. This format is also fully backward  
compatible with all existing decoders. This means that DVD  
players can play this software using a conventional DTS 5.1  
channel decoder.  
from any stereo source  
• Dolby Pro Logic II – 5.1 channel sound (stereo  
surround) from any stereo source  
• Dolby Pro Logic IIx – 6.1 or 7.1 channel sound (stereo  
surround and surround back) from two channel or  
5.1(and 6.1) channel sources  
“DTS”, “DTS-ES”, “Neo:6” and “DTS 96/24” are trademarks of  
Digital Theater Systems, Inc.  
With two channel sources, the “.1” subwoofer channel is  
generated by bass management in the receiver.  
84  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
12  
speakers. This ensures seamless panning between the front and  
surround speakers.  
Windows Media® Audio 9 Professional  
Windows Media Audio 9 Professional (WMA9 Pro) is a  
discrete surround format developed by Microsoft  
Corporation.  
®
•
Adaptive Decorrelation  
In a movie theatre, a large number of surround speakers help create  
an enveloping surround sound experience, but in a home theatre  
there are usually only two speakers. This can make the surround  
speakers sound like headphones that lack spaciousness and  
envelopment. The surround sounds will also collapse into the closest  
speaker as you move away from the middle seating position. Adaptive  
Decorrelation slightly changes one surround channel's time and  
phase relationship with respect to the other surround channel. This  
expands the listening position and creates—with only two speakers—  
the same spacious surround experience as in a movie theatre.  
WMA9 Pro can support up to 5.1/7.1 channel playback with  
sampling rates up to 24-bit/96 kHz. Using the unique WMA  
compression techniques, WMA9 Pro can deliver  
multichannel music and soundtracks over high-speed  
internet networks at low bit rates with minimal audio  
degradation. Playback may be enjoyed with the Windows  
Media Player 9 Series (or above) and other third-party  
media players on a personal computer, or with an AV  
amplifier with on-board WMA9 Pro decoding.  
•
THX Select2  
Before any home theatre component can be THX Select2 certified, it  
must incorporate all the features above and also pass a rigorous  
series of quality and performance tests. Only then can a product  
feature the THX Select2 logo, which is your guarantee that the Home  
Theatre products you purchase will give you superb performance for  
many years to come. THX Select2 requirements cover every aspect of  
the product including pre-amplifier and power amplifier performance  
and operation, and hundreds of other parameters in both the digital  
and analog domain.  
®
®
Windows Media and the Windows logo are trademarks or  
registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United  
States and/or other countries.  
•
THX Surround EX  
THX Surround EX - Dolby Digital Surround EX is a joint development  
of Dolby Laboratories and the THX Ltd. In a movie theater, film  
soundtracks that have been encoded with Dolby Digital Surround EX  
technology are able to reproduce an extra channel which has been  
added during the mixing of the program. This channel, called  
Surround Back, places sounds behind the listener in addition to the  
currently available front left, front center, front right, surround right,  
surround left and subwoofer channels. This additional channel  
provides the opportunity for more detailed imaging behind the  
listener and brings more depth, spacious ambience and sound  
localization than ever before. Movies that were created using the  
Dolby Digital Surround EX technology, when released into the home  
consumer market may exhibit wording to that effect on the  
packaging. A list of movies created using this technology can be  
found on the Dolby web site at www.dolby.com.  
Only receiver and controller products bearing the THX Surround EX  
logo, when in the THX Surround EX mode, faithfully reproduce this  
new technology in the home.  
This product may also engage the “THX Surround EX” mode during  
the playback of 5.1 channel material that is not Dolby Digital  
Surround EX encoded. In such case the information delivered to the  
Surround Back channel will be program dependent and may or may  
not be very pleasing depending on the particular soundtrack and the  
tastes of the individual listener.  
About THX  
The THX technologies are explained below. See  
www.thx.com for more detailed information.  
•
THX Cinema processing  
THX is an exclusive set of standards and technologies established by  
THX Ltd. THX grew from George Lucas' personal desire to make your  
experience of the film soundtrack, in both movie theatres and in your  
home theatre, as faithful as possible to what the director intended.  
Movie soundtracks are mixed in special movie theatres called  
dubbing stages and are designed to be played back in movie theatres  
with similar equipment and conditions. This same soundtrack is then  
transferred directly onto Laserdisc, VHS tape, DVD, etc., and is not  
changed for playback in a small home theatre environment. THX  
engineers developed patented technologies to accurately translate  
the sound from the movie theatre environment into the home,  
correcting the tonal and spatial errors that occur. On this product,  
when the THX indicator is on, THX features are automatically added  
in Cinema modes (e.g. THX Cinema, THX Surround EX).  
•
Advanced Speaker Array (ASA)  
ASA is a proprietary THX technology which processes the sound fed  
to 2 side and 2 back surround speakers to provide the optimal  
surround sound experience. When you set up your home theater  
system using all eight speaker outputs (Left, Center, Right, Surround  
Right, Surround Back Right, Surround Back Left, Surround Left and  
Subwoofer) placing the two Surround Back speakers close together  
facing the front of the room as shown in the diagram will provide the  
largest sweet spot. If for practical reasons you have to place the  
Surround Back speakers apart, you will need to go THX Audio Set-up  
screen and choose the setting that most closely corresponds to the  
speaker spacing, which will re-optimize the surround sound-field.  
ASA is used in three new modes; THX Select2 Cinema, THX  
MusicMode and THX Games Mode.  
•
Re-Equalization  
The tonal balance of a film soundtrack will be excessively bright and  
harsh when played back over audio equipment in the home because  
film soundtracks were designed to be played back in large movie  
theaters using very different professional equipment. Re-Equalization  
restores the correct tonal balance for watching a movie soundtrack in  
a small home environment.  
•
Timbre Matching  
The human ear changes our perception of a sound depending on the  
direction from which the sound is coming. In a movie theatre, there is  
an array of surround speakers so that the surround information is all  
around you. In a home theatre, you use only two speakers located to  
the side of your head. The Timbre Matching feature filters the  
information going to the surround speakers so that they more closely  
match the tonal characteristics of the sound coming from the front  
•
THX Select2 Cinema mode  
THX Select2 Cinema mode plays 5.1 movies using all 8 speakers  
giving you the best possible movie watching experience. In this mode,  
85  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
12  
ASA processing blends the side surround speakers and back  
surround speakers providing the optimal mix of ambient and  
directional surround sounds.  
channels of all 5.1 encoded music sources such as DTS, Dolby Digital  
and DVD-Audio to provide a wide stable rear soundstage.  
•
THX Games Mode  
DTS-ES (Matrix and 6.1 Discrete) and Dolby Digital Surround EX  
encoded soundtracks will be automatically detected in Select2  
Cinema mode if the appropriate flag has been encoded.  
Some Dolby Digital Surround EX soundtracks are missing the digital  
flag that allows automatic switching. If you know that the movie that  
you are watching is encoded in Surround EX, you can manually select  
the THX Surround EX playback mode, otherwise THX Select2 Cinema  
mode will apply ASA processing to provide optimum replay.  
For the replay of stereo and multi-channel game audio the THX  
Games Mode should be selected. In this mode THX ASA processing  
is applied to the surround channels of all 5.1 and 2.0 encoded game  
sources such as analog, PCM, DTS and Dolby Digital. This accurately  
places all game audio surround information, providing a full 360  
degree playback environment. THX Games Mode is unique as it gives  
you a smooth transition of audio in all points of the surround field.  
The THX logo is a trademark of THX Ltd. which may be  
registered in some jurisdictions. All rights reserved.  
•
THX MusicMode  
For the replay of multi-channel music the THX MusicMode should be  
selected. In this mode THX ASA processing is applied to the surround  
Listening modes with different input signal formats  
The following charts outline the listening modes available with different input signal formats, depending on the surround back  
channel processing and decoding method you have selected.  
Stereo (2 channel) signal formats  
SBch Processing  
Input signal format  
Standard  
THX  
Auto Surround  
SBch  
Dolby Digital Surround  
2Pro Logic IIx MOVIE  
2Pro Logic IIx MUSIC  
2Pro Logic IIx GAME  
2Pro Logic IIx MOVIE+THX  
2Pro Logic IIx MOVIE  
a
Processing  
2PRO LOGIC+THX  
ON/AUTO  
Neo:6 CINEMA+THX  
a
(Automatically  
selects 6.1/7.1  
channel decoding)  
b
2PRO LOGIC  
Neo:6 CINEMA  
Neo:6 MUSIC  
THX GAMES MODE  
DTS Surround  
As above  
As above  
As above  
As above  
As above  
–
Neo:6 CINEMA  
Stereo playback  
Stereo playback  
Other stereo sources  
c
DVD-A and SACD  
SBch  
Processing  
OFF  
(Maximum 5.1  
channel playback)  
Dolby Digital Surround  
2Pro Logic II MOVIE  
2Pro Logic II MUSIC  
2Pro Logic II GAME  
2PRO LOGIC  
Neo:6 CINEMA  
Neo:6 MUSIC  
2Pro Logic II MOVIE+THX  
2PRO LOGIC+THX  
Neo:6 CINEMA+THX  
2Pro Logic II MOVIE  
a
a
DTS Surround  
As above  
As above  
As above  
As above  
As above  
–
Neo:6 CINEMA  
Stereo playback  
Stereo playback  
Other stereo sources  
c
DVD-A and SACD  
a.2PRO LOGIC has a maximum of 5.1 channel playback.  
b.Unavailable with only one surround back speaker connected.  
c.VSX-AX4ASi only.  
86  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
12  
Multichannel signal formats  
SBch Processing  
Input signal format  
Standard  
THX  
Auto Surround  
SBch  
Processing  
ON  
(7.1 channel  
decoding used for  
all sources)  
WMA9 Pro (6.1/7.1 channel)  
Straight decoding  
WMA+THX CINEMA  
Straight decoding  
Dolby Digital EX (6.1 channel  
flagged)  
Dolby Digital EX  
2Pro Logic IIx MOVIE  
2Pro Logic IIx MUSIC  
THX SURROUND EX  
Dolby Digital EX  
2Pro Logic IIx MOVIE  
a
a
a
2Pro Logic IIx MOVIE+THX  
a
THX Select2 CINEMA  
THX MUSICMODE  
THX GAMES MODE  
a
a
DTS-ES (6.1 channel sources/6.1  
channel flagged)  
DTS-ES (Matrix/Discrete)  
DTS+2Pro Logic IIx MOVIE  
DTS+2Pro Logic IIx MUSIC  
DTS-ES+THX (Matrix/Discrete)  
DTS-ES (Matrix/Discrete)  
DTS+Neo:6  
a
a
a
DTS+2Pro Logic IIx MOVIE+THX  
a
THX Select2 CINEMA  
THX MUSICMODE  
THX GAMES MODE  
a
a
DTS and DTS 96/24  
(5.1 channel encoding)  
DTS+Neo:6  
DTS+2Pro Logic IIx MOVIE  
DTS+2Pro Logic IIx MUSIC  
DTS+Neo:6+THX  
a
DTS+2Pro Logic IIx MOVIE+THX  
a
THX Select2 CINEMA  
THX MUSICMODE  
THX GAMES MODE  
a
a
Dolby Digital  
WMA9 Pro  
(5.1 channel encoding)  
Dolby Digital EX  
2Pro Logic IIx MOVIE  
2Pro Logic IIx MUSIC  
THX SURROUND EX  
2Pro Logic IIx MOVIE+THX  
Dolby Digital EX  
2Pro Logic IIx MOVIE  
a
a
a
a
THX Select2 CINEMA  
a
THX MUSICMODE  
a
THX GAMES MODE  
b
a
Dolby Digital EX  
2Pro Logic IIx MOVIE  
2Pro Logic IIx MUSIC  
Dolby Digital EX  
2Pro Logic IIx MOVIE  
DVD-A and SACD  
THX MUSICMODE  
a
a
(5.1 channel encoding)  
SBch  
Processing  
WMA9 Pro (6.1/7.1 channel)  
Straight decoding  
WMA+THX CINEMA  
THX SURROUND EX  
Straight decoding  
Dolby Digital EX  
(6.1 channel flagged)  
Dolby Digital EX  
2Pro Logic IIx MOVIE  
Dolby Digital EX  
2Pro Logic IIx MOVIE  
AUTO  
a
a
(Automatically  
selects 6.1/7.1  
channel decoding)  
DTS-ES (6.1 channel sources/6.1  
channel flagged)  
DTS-ES (Matrix/Discrete)  
DTS-ES+THX (Matrix/Discrete)  
DTS-ES (Matrix/Discrete)  
Dolby Digital  
DTS and DTS 96/24  
WMA9 Pro  
Straight decoding  
THX Select2 CINEMA  
Straight decoding  
(Maximum 5.1 channel  
playback)  
(Maximum 5.1 channel playback) (Maximum 5.1 channel THX CINEMA  
playback with only one surround back  
speaker)  
(5.1 channel encoding)  
b
a
Straight decoding  
Straight decoding  
(Maximum 5.1 channel  
playback)  
DVD-A and SACD  
THX MUSICMODE  
THX CINEMA  
(Maximum 5.1 channel playback)  
(5.1 channel encoding)  
SBch  
WMA9 Pro (6.1/7.1 channel)  
Straight decoding  
Straight decoding  
Processing  
Dolby Digital EX  
(6.1 channel flagged)  
DTS-ES (6.1 channel sources/6.1  
channel flagged)  
c
OFF  
(Maximum 5.1  
channel playback)  
Dolby Digital  
DTS and DTS 96/24  
WMA9 Pro  
(5.1 channel encoding)  
b
Straight decoding  
–
Straight decoding  
DVD-A and SACD  
(5.1 channel encoding)  
a.Unavailable with only one surround back speaker connected.  
b.VSX-AX4ASi only.  
c.Automatically selected if no surround back speakers are connected.  
87  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
12  
Stream direct with different input signal formats  
The following charts show what you will hear with different input signal formats, depending on the Stream Direct mode (see  
Using Stream Direct on page 30) you have selected.  
Stereo (2 channel) signal formats  
Surround Back speaker(s)  
Input signal format  
DIRECT  
PURE DIRECT  
Connected  
(Maximum 7.1 channel playback)  
Dolby Digital Surround  
DTS Surround  
2Pro Logic IIx MOVIE  
Neo:6 CINEMA  
Stereo playback  
As above  
2Pro Logic IIx MOVIE  
Neo:6 CINEMA  
Other stereo sources  
Analog sources  
PCM sources  
Stereo playback  
ANALOG DIRECT (stereo)  
PCM DIRECT (stereo)  
PCM DIRECT (stereo)  
SACD DIRECT (stereo)  
As above  
DVD-A sources  
As above  
a
As above  
SACD sources  
Not connected  
(Maximum 5.1 channel playback)  
Dolby Digital Surround  
DTS Surround  
2Pro Logic II MOVIE  
Neo:6 CINEMA  
Stereo playback  
As above  
2Pro Logic II MOVIE  
Neo:6 CINEMA  
Other stereo sources  
Analog sources  
PCM sources  
Stereo playback  
ANALOG DIRECT (stereo)  
PCM DIRECT (stereo)  
PCM DIRECT (stereo)  
SACD DIRECT (stereo)  
As above  
DVD-A sources  
As above  
a
As above  
SACD sources  
a.VSX-AX4ASi only.  
Multichannel signal formats  
Surround Back speaker(s)  
Input signal format  
DIRECT  
PURE DIRECT  
Connected  
(Maximum 7.1 channel playback)  
WMA9 Pro (6.1/7.1 channel)  
Straight decoding  
Straight decoding  
Dolby Digital EX (6.1 channel flagged)  
Dolby Digital EX  
2Pro Logic IIx MOVIE  
Dolby Digital EX  
2Pro Logic IIx MOVIE  
a
a
DTS-ES (6.1 channel sources/6.1 channel flagged)  
DTS-ES (Matrix/Discrete)  
DTS-ES (Matrix/Discrete)  
Dolby Digital  
DTS and DTS 96/24  
WMA9 Pro  
Straight decoding  
Straight decoding  
(5.1 channel encoding)  
DVD-A sources  
As above  
As above  
PCM DIRECT  
SACD DIRECT  
b
SACD sources  
(5.1 channel encoding)  
Not connected  
(Maximum 5.1 channel playback)  
WMA9 Pro (6.1/7.1 channel)  
Straight decoding  
Straight decoding  
Dolby Digital EX  
(6.1 channel flagged)  
As above  
As above  
DTS-ES (6.1 channel sources/6.1 channel flagged)  
As above  
As above  
As above  
As above  
Dolby Digital  
DTS and DTS 96/24  
WMA9 Pro  
(5.1 channel encoding)  
DVD-A sources  
As above  
As above  
PCM DIRECT  
SACD DIRECT  
b
SACD sources  
(5.1 channel encoding)  
a.Unavailable with only one surround back speaker connected.  
b.VSX-AX4ASi only.  
88  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
Specifications  
12  
FM Tuner Section  
Frequency Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87.5 MHz to 108 MHz  
Usable Sensitivity . . . . . . Mono: 15.2 dBf, IHF (1.6 µV/75 Ω)  
50 dB Quieting Sensitivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mono: 20.2 dBf  
Stereo: 41.2 dBf  
Amplifier Section  
Maximum Output Power (1 kHz, THD 10.0 %, 6 Ω)  
. . . . . . . .270 W/channel (AX4ASi), 250 W/channel (AX2AS)  
Sensitivity (DIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mono: 1.1 µV (S/N 26 dB)  
Stereo: 50 µV (S/N 46 dB)  
Signal-to-Noise Ratio . . . . . . . . . . . Mono: 76 dB (at 85 dBf)  
Stereo: 72 dB (at 85 dBf)  
Continuous Power Output  
Signal-to-Noise Ratio (DIN). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mono: 62 dB  
Stereo: 58 dB  
Distortion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Stereo: 0.6 % (1 kHz)  
Alternate Channel Selectivity . . . . . . . . . . . 70 dB (400 kHz)  
Stereo Separation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 dB (1 kHz)  
Frequency Response . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Hz to 15 kHz 1dB  
Antenna Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75 Ω unbalanced  
(DIN 1 kHz, THD 1 %, 6 Ω)  
Front. . . 180 W + 180 W (AX4ASi), 170 W + 170 W (AX2AS)  
Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180 W (AX4ASi), 170 W (AX2AS)  
Surround . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180 W + 180 W (AX4ASi)  
170 W + 170 W (AX2AS)  
Surround back . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180 W + 180 W (AX4ASi)  
170 W + 170 W (AX2AS)  
AM Tuner Section  
(DIN 1 kHz, THD 1 %, 8 Ω)  
Frequency Range . . . . . . .531 kHz to 1602 kHz (9 kHz step)  
Sensitivity (IHF, Loop antenna) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350 µV/m  
Selectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 dB  
Signal-to-Noise Ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 dB  
Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Loop antenna  
Front. . . 150 W + 150 W (AX4ASi), 140 W + 140 W (AX2AS)  
Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150 W (AX4ASi), 140 W (AX2AS)  
Surround . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150 W + 150 W (AX4ASi)  
140 W + 140 W (AX2AS)  
Surround back . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150 W + 150 W (AX4ASi)  
140 W + 140 W (AX2AS)  
Miscellaneous  
Power Requirements. . . . . . . . AC 110 V/AC 120 V to 127 V/  
AC 220 V/AC 230 V to 240 V, 50 Hz/60 Hz  
Power Consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460 W  
In standby . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.65 W  
Dimensions . . . . . 420 (W) mm x 187 (H) mm x 462 (D) mm  
Weight (without package). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.4 kg (AX4ASi)  
16.3 kg (AX2AS)  
Rated Power Output (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.09 %, 8 Ω)  
. . . . . . . . . 140 W+140 W (AX4ASi), 130 W+130 W (AX2AS)  
Audio Section  
Input (Sensitivity/Impedance)  
LINE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335 mV/47 kΩ  
Frequency Response (LINE). . . . . . 5 Hz to 100 000 Hz dB  
Output (Level/Impedance)  
Furnished Parts  
Setup microphone (for Auto MCACC setup) . . . . . . . . . 1  
AA/R6P dry cell batteries  
REC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335 mV/2.2 kΩ  
Tone Control  
BASS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 dB (100 Hz)  
TREBLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 dB (10 kHz)  
LOUDNESS. . . . . . . . . . . .+4 dB/+2 dB (100 Hz/10 kHz)  
(at volume position –40 dB)  
VSX-AX4ASi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4  
VSX-AX2AS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2  
Remote control unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1  
Sub room remote control unit (VSX-AX4ASi only) . . . . . . . . .1  
AM loop antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1  
FM wire antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1  
iPod cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1  
Power cords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2  
Antenna adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1  
Flat-bladed converter plug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1  
These operating instructions  
Signal-to-Noise Ratio (IHF, short circuited, A network)  
LINE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 dB  
Signal-to-Noise Ratio  
[DIN (continuous rated power output/50 mW)]  
LINE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 dB/65 dB  
Composite Video / S-Video Section  
Input (Sensitivity/Impedance) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Vp-p/75 Ω  
Output (Level/Impedance) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Vp-p/75 Ω  
Signal-to-Noise Ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 dB  
Frequency Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Hz to 10 MHz  
Note  
• Specifications and the design are subject to possible  
modifications without notice, due to improvements.  
Component Video Section  
Input (Sensitivity/Impedance) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Vp-p/75 Ω  
Output (Level/Impedance) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Vp-p/75 Ω  
Signal-to-Noise Ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 dB  
Frequency Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Hz to 100 MHz  
89  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional information  
Cleaning the unit  
12  
•
Phase correction  
The Phase Control technology incorporated into this  
receiver’s design provides coherent sound reproduction  
through the use of phase matching for an optimal sound  
image at your listening position.  
• Use a polishing cloth or dry cloth to wipe off dust and  
dirt.  
• When the surface is dirty, wipe with a soft cloth  
dipped in some neutral cleanser diluted five or six  
times with water, and wrung out well, and then wipe  
again with a dry cloth. Do not use furniture wax or  
cleansers.  
•
i.LINK digital interface (VSX-AX4ASi only)  
The i.LINK interface makes it possible to connect this  
receiver to i.LINK-equipped components, allowing you to  
enjoy high sampling rate (up to 192 kHz) PCM  
multichannel digital audio from DVD-Audio and SACD  
discs, as well as digital audio from DVD-Video, CD and  
Video CD discs, all with a single cable.  
• Never use thinners, benzine, insecticide sprays or  
other chemicals on or near this unit, since these will  
corrode the surface.  
•
HDMI and digital video conversion  
This receiver is compatible with the HDMI digital video  
format, providing you high-definition digital video and  
digital audio via a single cable. Also, using this receiver’s  
built-in digital video converter, de-interlacing and up-  
scaling are both possible, and analog video signals can  
be output through the HDMI terminal as digital video.  
Our philosophy  
Pioneer is dedicated to making your home theater  
listening experience as close as possible to the vision of  
the moviemakers and mastering engineer when they  
created the original soundtrack. We do this by focusing  
on three important steps:  
•
DCDi  
Faroudja’s DCDi Processing is selectable and ensures  
that images are smooth and natural, without staircasing  
or jaggies.  
1
Achieving the highest possible sound quality  
2
Allowing for customized acoustic calibration  
according to any listening area  
•
iPod Ready  
3
Fine-tuning the receiver with the help of world-  
With the new iPod terminal, you’ll be up and running in  
no time, now that this receiver’s enhanced compatibility  
makes on-screen control of your iPod an added  
possibility.  
1 With the cooperation of AIR Studios, this receiver has been designated  
AIR Studios Monitor Reference:  
1
class studio engineers  
Features  
•
Easy setup using Advanced MCACC  
The Auto MCACC Setup provides a quick but accurate  
surround sound setup, which includes the advanced  
features of Professional Acoustic Calibration EQ. This  
innovative technology measures the reverb  
characteristics of your listening area, allowing you to  
customize your system calibration with the help of a  
graphical output that can be displayed on-screen, or  
using a computer. With the additional benefits of  
numerous MCACC preset memories, standing wave  
control and microphone measurements from a series of  
reference points, your home theater experience can be  
truly customized for optimal surround sound.  
90  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Pioneer Authorized Distributors  
REP. OF SOUTH AFRICA  
THAILAND  
AFRICATEK (PTY) LTD.  
29 Heronmere Road, Reuven Booysens.  
Johannesburg 2091  
P.O.Box 121 Linmeyer 2105  
TEL: 490 9202  
PIONEER ELECTRONICS (THAILAND) CO.,  
LTD.  
FL. 1 & 7 Chaiyo Building.  
91/1 Rama 9Rd.  
Huaykwang, Bangkok 10320,  
TEL: 02-6439511  
HONG KONG  
PIONEER (HK) LTD.  
U.A.E.  
PIONEER GULF FZE  
Lob 11-017, Jebel Ali Free Zone,  
P.O. Box 61226, Jebel Ali, Dubai, U.A.E.  
TEL: 971-4-881-5756  
Suites 901-906, 9/F, World Commerce Centre,  
Harbour City, 11 Canton Road, Tsim Sha Tsui,  
Kowloon, Hong Kong  
TEL: 2848-6488  
INDONESIA  
AUSTRALIA  
P.T. ADAB ALAM ELECTRONIC  
Jl. K.H. Zainul Arifin No. 13A Jakarta-Pusat  
TEL: + (021) 6331924, 6331859, 6337665,  
6337767  
PIONEER ELECTRONICS AUSTRALIA PTY.  
LTD.  
Melbourne: 178-184 Boundary Rd., Braeside,  
Victoria. 3195  
TEL: (03)9586 6300  
MALAYSIA  
PIONEER TECHNOLOGY (M) SDN. BHD  
16th Floor, Menara Uni. Asia  
1008, Jalan Sultan Ismail 50250, Kuala Lumpur  
TEL: 03 2697 2920  
Sydney:  
Unit D. 15 Rodborough Rd, French  
Forest, New South Wales, 2086  
TEL: (02)9452 0200  
NEW ZEALAND  
MONACO CORP. LTD.  
10 Rothwell Ave., Albany. Auckland  
P.O. Box 4399, Auckland 1  
TEL: 94157444  
PHILIPPINES  
MGM ELECTRONICS CORP.  
708 Apelo Cruz St. Malibay  
P.O. Box 473, Pasay city  
TEL: (02)8526706  
MEXICO  
PIONEER ELECTRONICS DE MEXICO,  
S.A.DE C.V.  
SINGAPORE  
Blvd. Manuel Avila Camacho138 piso 10  
Colonia Lomas de Chapultepec, Mexico,  
D.F. 11000  
PIONEER ASIACENTRE PTE LTD. Domestic  
Service Dept.  
253, Alexandra Road #04-01 Singapore, 159936  
TEL: 64727555  
TEL: 52-55-9178-4270  
REP. OF PANAMA  
TAIWAN  
PIONEER INTERNATIONAL LATIN  
PIONEER HIGH FIDELITY TAIWAN CO., LTD.  
13th Floor, No44, Chung Shan North Rd  
Sec.2, Taipei  
AMERICA, S.A.  
P.O. Box 5140, Panama 5, Republic of Panama  
TEL: 507-210-1466  
TEL: (02)25213166  
When using the Advanced MCACC setup, you have the option of displaying the results using a computer. To obtain  
the software for this feature (as referred to in Connecting a PC for Advanced MCACC output on page 62), please  
contact the Pioneer Authorized Distributor for your area as listed above.  
Published by Pioneer Corporation.  
Copyright © 2006 Pioneer Corporation.  
All rights reserved.  
PIONEER CORPORATION  
4-1, Meguro 1-Chome, Meguro-ku, Tokyo 153-8654, Japan  
PIONEER ELECTRONICS (USA) INC.  
P.O. BOX 1540, Long Beach, California 90810-1540, U.S.A. TEL: (800) 421-1404  
PIONEER ELECTRONICS OF CANADA, INC.  
300 Allstate Parkway, Markham, Ontario L3R OP2, Canada TEL: 1-877-283-5901  
PIONEER EUROPE NV  
Haven 1087, Keetberglaan 1, B-9120 Melsele, Belgium TEL: 03/570.05.11  
PIONEER ELECTRONICS ASIACENTRE PTE. LTD.  
253 Alexandra Road, #04-01, Singapore 159936 TEL: 65-6472-7555  
PIONEER ELECTRONICS AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD.  
178-184 Boundary Road, Braeside, Victoria 3195, Australia, TEL: (03) 9586-6300  
PIONEER ELECTRONICS DE MEXICO S.A. DE C.V.  
Blvd.Manuel Avila Camacho 138 10 piso Col.Lomas de Chapultepec, Mexico,D.F. 11000 TEL: 55-9178-4270  
K002_A_En  
<06G00001>  
Printed in  
<XRB3068-A>  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Peavey Musical Instrument Amplifier 6505 User Manual
Philips Blu ray Player BDP7500SL User Manual
Philips Food Processor HR7633 User Manual
Philips Projection Television 64PP 9901 User Manual
Philips Projector cSmart Series User Manual
Philips Styling Iron HP4605 User Manual
Pioneer Stereo System VSX 817 K User Manual
Pioneer Welder CDJ 2000nexus User Manual
Poulan Chainsaw 530088740 User Manual
ProMaster Digital Camera 5364 User Manual